Specifications

PART A
FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
A.1 REQUIREMENTS
A.1.1 Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain field offices and testing laboratories,
including all the necessary electricity, water, drainage and telephone services for the use of the
Engineer and his staff. The offices and laboratories shall have at least the floor area prescribed
on the Plans and shall contain the equipment, supplies and furnishings specified in the Contract.
Testing equipment supplied in accordance with the Special Provisions shall be located in testing
laboratories as required by the Engineer. All offices and laboratories shall be ready for
occupancy and use by the Engineer within two (2) months of the commencement of the Works.
Their location and final plan shall require the approval of the Engineer prior to the start of
construction. It is the intent of this Specification to locate the field offices and laboratories in
government owned lots so that the use by the government of these facilities can be maximized
even after the completion of the project. However, if no government lot is available, and these
structures are to be erected on private property, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make
the necessary arrangements with the landowner(s) regarding the use of the lot for the
Engineer’s office and laboratories and to remove and/or transfer, if so required under the
Contract, the improvements thereon, including all appurtenances upon completion of the Works.
All facilities provided by the Contractor shall be near the job site, where necessary and
shall conform to the best standard for the required types. On completion of the Contract, the
facilities provided by the Contractor including utilities and communication facilities shall revert to
the Government including office equipment, apparatus, pieces of furniture, laboratory
equipment, etc, unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary), grading and
drainage in the vicinity of each facility with suitable access walkways, seeding and sodding of
the ground around as directed and approved by the Engineer. Also, the Contractor shall
construct a parking area for the compound near the buildings and a satisfactory access road to
the parking areas.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all facilities to
be provided during the duration of the Contract, including providing adequate stock of all
expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes, laboratory equipment and supplies at all
times to ensure proper and continuous functioning of all the Engineer’s facilities.
The whole area of the Engineer’s compound shall be fenced with barbed wire (or
equivalent) with necessary gates as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide
suitable utilities and services, such as potable water, electricity, sewerage and security on a 24-
hour basis.
2. The Contractor shall provided qualified and experienced laboratory staff to carry out
all the materials quality control and all the tests specified in the Contract and required by the
Engineer. The person so appointed by the Contractor to manage the laboratory shall be well
experienced in the type of work to be undertaken and shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. He shall work full time and shall be responsible to the Engineer for all works carried
out.
3. The telephone service, if required in the Contract shall have a separate connection
direct to the telephone company’s telephone exchange single line for the exclusive use of the
Engineer and his staff.
4. The Contractor shall provide, if required in the Contract, a two-way radio

communication service.
5. Any portable offices required in the Contract shall be dismantled, moved and erected
from time to time as directed by the Engineer.
6. All offices, stores and testing laboratories shall be proficiently guarded at all times of
the day and night, regularly and properly cleaned, adequately supplied and maintained for the
duration of the Contract.
A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide within thirty (30) calendar days after notice to commence
work, the vehicles listed in the Special Provisions for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The
vehicles to be provided by the Contractor shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All
vehicles shall comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local laws statutes
and regulations. All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the accessories as may be prescribed
by laws and have comprehensive insurance. The vehicles on delivery shall be new and shall be
driven by a competent qualified and experienced driver who shall be under the direct order of
the Engineer.
The contractor shall maintain the vehicle in first class condition and shall be supplied
with appropriate fuel and lubricants al all times.
He shall provide equivalent substitute vehicles during any period when the specified
vehicles are taken out of service for maintenance, repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise
specified, the vehicle shall at the end of the Contract become the property of the Government.
A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer
The Contractor shall at all times during the duration of the Contract provide for the use of
the Engineer all equipment, instruments and apparatus, all information and records and
qualified chainmen and laborers required by the Engineer for inspecting and measuring the
Works. Such equipment, instruments and apparatus shall include those listed in the Special
Provisions.
A.1.4 Photographs
The Contractor shall provide record photographs taken as, when and where directed by
the Engineer at intervals of not more than one month. The photographs shall be sufficient in
number and location to record the exact progress of the Works. The Contractor shall provide
one proof print of each photograph taken, and the negative and ten copies, not less than 254
mm x 203 mm and printed on glossy paper, of any of the photographs by the Engineer. The
photographs retained by the Engineer will become the property of the Government and the
Contractor shall supply approved albums to accommodate them. Two copies are to be signed
by the Contractor, one of which will be signed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor.
A.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A.2.1 Measurement
1. Lump-sum items shall be provided for the provision of:
- Office building for the Engineer including pieces of furnitures, appliances and
equipment.
- Laboratory building for the Engineer including furnitures, appliances and equipment.
- Survey equipment for the Engineer.
2. The quantities for the maintenance of the office and the laboratory for the Engineer
shall be for the time the Engineer occupies the office and the laboratory respectively.
The unit of the measure is “month”.
3. No separate payment shall be made in respect of consumable materials as this is

deemed to be included in the pay item for maintenance of the Engineer’s facilities.
4. The quantities for the provision of vehicles for the Engineer shall be the number of
each type of vehicle supplied. The unit of measure is “each”.
5. The quantities for the operation of vehicle for the Engineer shall be for the time the
Engineer is supplied with each vehicle prior to their finally becoming the property of the
Government. The unit of measure is “month”.
6. The quantities for progress photographs shall be the number of photographs selected
and provided as progress photographs. The unit of measure is ‘each”.
A.2.2 Payment
The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the appropriate
contract unit price, for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and maintaining such items.
PART B
OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ACCOMMODATION FOR

CONTRACTOR
The contractor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores, workshops latrines,
housing and messing accommodations as are necessary. These should be located in the
Contractor’s compound, distinct and separate from the Engineer’s compound. The location,
dimensions and layout of such buildings and places shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not be permitted to erect temporary buildings or structures on
the site without the specific permission in writing of the Engineer including approval of the
dimensions of such buildings or structures. Before the commencement of the period of
Warranty, the Contractor shall fence of the Contractor’s store area from the rest of the Site. By
the end of the Period of Warranty, the Contractor shall remove this fence and all buildings shall
be cleared and the area shall be graded as required by the Engineer.
B.2 MEDICAL ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the duration of the Contract, a
medical room together with all necessary supplies to be sited in the Contractor’s main
area. The medical room shall be waterproof; it could be a building or rooms
designated and used exclusively for the purpose and have a floor area of at least 15
square meters and a glazed window area of at least 2 square meters.
2. The Contractor shall employ permanently on the site a fully trained Medical Aide who
shall be engaged solely from medical duties.
3. The location of the medical room and any other arrangements shall be made known to
all employees by posting on prominent locations suitable notices in the Site.
4. The Contractor’s arrangement to comply with this Section shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer and also to the approval of any qualified Medical Officer
designated by the Government to supervise medical arrangements on the Site.
B.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work prescribed in Section B.2 shall not be measured and paid separately, same shall
be deemed to be included in pay items for other items for work.
PART C
EARTHWORK
ITEM 100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING
100.1 Description
This item shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all vegetation and
debris as designated in the Contract, except those objects that are designated to remain in
place or are to be removed in consonance with other provisions of this Specification. The work
shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all objects designated to remain.
100.2 Construction Requirements
100.2.1 General
The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs, plants and
other things to remain. The Contractor shall preserve all objects designated to remain. Paint
required for cut or scarred surface of trees or shrubs selected for retention shall be an approved
asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree surgery.
Clearing shall extend one (1) meter beyond the toe of the fill slopes or beyond rounding
of cut slopes as the case maybe for the entire length of the project unless otherwise shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer and provided it is within the right of way limits of the
project, with the exception of trees under the jurisdiction of the Forest Management Bureau
(FMB).
100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing
All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions, not
designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing as required, except as
provided below:
(1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and nonperishable solid objects with a
minimum depth of one (1) meter below subgrade or slope of embankment will not be required.
(2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps and
nonperishable solid objects shall be cut off not more than 150 mm (6 inches) above the ground
line or low water level.
(3) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be cut off flush with or
below the surface of the final slope line.
(4) Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be required only to the depth
necessitated by the proposed excavation within such areas.
(5) In areas covered by cogon/talahib, wild grass and other vegetations, top soil shall be
cut to a maximum depth of 150 mm below the original ground surface or as designated by the
Engineer, and disposed outside the clearing and grubbing limits as indicated in the typical
roadway section.
Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which obstructions
are removed shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted to the required density.
If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant care of component
watchmen at such times and in such a manner that the surrounding vegetation, other adjacent
property, or anything designated to remain on the right of way will not be jeopardized. If
permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulation.
The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e., incinerators, high
stacking or pit and ditch burning with forced air supplements) that produce intense burning with
little or no visible smoke emission during the burning process. At the conclusion of each burning
session, the fire shall be completely extinguished so that no smoldering debris remains.
In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start burning
operations or to suspend such operations because of hazardous weather conditions, material to
be burned which interferes with subsequent construction operations shall be moved by the
Contractor to temporary locations clear of construction operations and later, if directed by the
Engineer, shall be placed on a designated spot and burned.
Materials and debris which cannot be burned and perishable materials may be disposed
off by methods and at locations approved by the Engineer, on or off the project. If disposal is by
burying, the debris shall be placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting.
Each layer shall be covered or mixed with earth material by the land-fill method to fill all voids.
The top layer of material buried shall be covered with at least 300 mm (12 inches) of earth or
other approved material and shall be graded, shaped and compacted to present a pleasing
appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the Contractor shall make all necessary
arrangements with property owners in writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations which are
outside the limits of view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid
price. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The disposal areas shall be
seeded, fertilized and mulched at the Contractor’s expense.
Woody material may be disposed off by chipping. The wood chips may be used for
mulch, slope erosion control or may be uniformly spread over selected areas as directed by the
Engineer. Wood chips used as mulch for slope erosion control shall have a maximum thickness
of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding 3900 mm2 (6 square inches) on any individual
surface area. Wood chips not designated for use under other sections shall be spread over the
designated areas in layers not to exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness. Diseased trees
shall be buried or disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
All merchantable timber in the clearing area which has not been removed from the right
of way prior to the beginning of construction shall become the property of the Contractor, unless
otherwise provided.
Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches on trees or shrubs
designated to remain shall be trimmed as directed. Branches of trees extending over the
roadbed shall be trimmed to give a clear height of 6 m (20 feet) above the roadbed surface. All
trimming shall be done by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree surgery practices.
Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled within the area to be
cleared.
100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps
Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and located in areas
other than those established for clearing and grubbing and roadside cleanup shall be removed
and disposed off as specified under Subsection 100.2.2 except trees removed shall be cut as
nearly flush with the ground as practicable without removing stumps.
100.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate methods:
1. Area Basis. The work to be paid for shall be the number of hectares and fractions
thereof acceptably cleared and grubbed within the limits indicated on the Plans or as
may be adjusted in field staking by the Engineer. Areas not within the clearing and
grubbing limits shown on the Plans or not staked for clearing and grubbing will not be
measured for payment.
2. Lump-Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities contains a Clearing and Grubbing lump-
sum item, no measurement of area will be made for such item.
3. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter of trees will be measured at a
height of 1.4 m (54 inches) above the ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6 inches) in
diameter will not be measured for payment.
When Bill of Quantities indicates measurement of trees by individual unit basis, the units
will be designated and measured in accordance with the following schedule of sizes:
Diameter at height of 1.4 m Pay Item Designation

Over 150mm to 900 mm small
Over 900 mm large
100.4 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 100.3, shall be paid for at
the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

100 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Hectare
100 (2) Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
100 (3) Individual Removal of Trees, small Each
100( 4) Individual Removal of Trees, small Each
ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
101.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the removal wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all
buildings, fences, structures, old pavements, abandoned pipe lines, and any other obstructions
which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the obstructions to be removed and
disposed off under other items in the Contract. It shall also include the salvaging of designated
materials and backfilling the resulting trenches, holes, and pits.
101.2.1 General
The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to the
roadway, on Government land or easement, as shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer. All designated salvable material shall be removed, without unnecessary damage, in
sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at
specified places on the project or as otherwise shown in the Special Provisions. Perishable
material shall be handled as designated in Subsection 100.2.2 Nonperishable material may be
disposed off outside the limits of view from the project with written permission of the property
owner on whose property the material is placed. Copies of all agreements with property owners
are to be furnished to the Engineer. Basements or cavities left by the structure removal shall be
filled with acceptable material to the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the prism of
construction, shall be compacted to the required density.
101.2.2 Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts, and other Drainage Structures
All existing bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be
removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. The removal
of existing culverts within embankment areas will be required only as necessary for the
installation of new structures. Abandoned culverts shall be broken down, crushed and sealed or
plugged. All retrieved culvert for future use as determined by the Engineer shall be carefully
removed and all precautions shall be employed to avoid breakage or structural damage to any
of its part. All sections of structures removed which are not designated for stockpiling or re-
laying shall become the property of the Government and be removed from the project or
disposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise directed, the substructures of existing structures shall be removed
down to the natural stream bottom and those parts outside of the stream shall be removed down
to at least 300 mm (12 inches) below natural ground surface. Where such portions of existing
structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new structure, they shall be removed as
necessary to accommodate the construction of the proposed structure.
Steel bridges and wood bridges when specified to be salvaged shall be carefully
dismantled without damaged. Steel members shall be match marked unless such match
marking is waived by the Engineer. All salvaged material shall be stored as specified in
Subsection 101.2.1.
Structures designated to become the property of the Contractor shall be removed from
the right-of-way.
Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or

obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be completed prior to placing the new
work, unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions.
101.2.3 Removal of Pipes Other than Pipe Culverts
Unless otherwise provided, all pipes shall be carefully removed and every precaution
taken to avoid breakage or damaged. Pipes to be re-laid shall be removed and stored when
necessary so that there will be no loss of damage before re-laying. The Contractor shall replace
sections lost from storage or damage by negligence, at his own expense. 101.2.4 Removal of
Existing Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, etc. All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks,
curbs, gutters, etc., designated for removal, shall be:
(1) Broken into pieces and used for riprap on the project, or
(2) Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inches) in any
dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the project for use by the
Government, or
(3) Otherwise demolished and disposed off as directed by the Engineer. When specified,
ballast, gravel, bituminous materials or other surfacing or pavement materials shall be
removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 101.2.1, otherwise such materials
shall be disposed off as directed.
There will be no separate payment for excavating for removal of structures and
obstructions or for backfilling and compacting the remaining cavity.
When the Contract stipulates that payment will be made for removal of obstructions on
lump-sum basis, the pay item will include all structures and obstructions encountered within the
roadway. Where the contract stipulates that payment will be made for the removal of specific
items on a unit basis, measurement will be made by the unit stipulated in the Contract.
Whenever the Bill of Quantities does not contain an item for any aforementioned
removals, the work will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation
of the Contractor under other Contract Items.
the Contract unit price or lump sum price bid for each of the Pay Items listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for
removing and disposing of obstructions, including materials, labor, equipments, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. The price shall also include
backfilling, salvage of materials removed, their custody, preservation, storage on the right-of-
way and disposal as provided herein.

101 (1) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Lump Sum
101 (2) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Each
101 (3) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Square Meter
101 (4) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Linear Meter
ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION
102.1 Description
This Item shall consist of roadway and drainage and borrow excavation and the disposal
of material in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
102.1.1 Roadway Excavation
Roadway excavation will include excavation and grading for roadways, parking areas,
intersections, approaches, slope rounding, benching, waterways and ditches; removal of
unsuitable material from the roadbed and beneath embankment areas; and excavating selected
material found in the roadway as ordered by the Engineer for specific use in the improvement.
Roadway excavation will be classified as “unclassified excavation”, “rock excavation”, “common
excavation”, or “muck excavation” as indicated in the Bill of Quantities and hereinafter
described.
(1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and
disposal of all materials regardless of its nature, not classified and included in the Bill of
Quantities under other pay items.
(2) Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall consist of igneous, sedimentary and
metamorphic rock which cannot be excavated without blasting or the use of rippers, and
all boulders or other detached stones each having a volume of 1 cubic meter or more as
determined by physical measurements or visually by the Engineer.
(3) Common Excavation. Common excavations shall consist of all excavation not
included in the Bill of Quantities under “rock excavation” or other pay items.
(4) Muck Excavation. Muck excavation shall consist of the removal and disposal of
deposits of saturated or unsaturated mixtures of soils and organic matter not suitable for
foundation material regardless of moisture content.
102.1.2 Borrow Excavation
Borrow excavation shall consist of the excavation and utilization of approved material required
for the construction of embankments or for other portions of the work, and shall be obtained
from approved sources, in accordance with Clause 61 and the following:
(1) Borrow, Case 1 Borrow Case 1 will consist of material obtained from sources
designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
(2) Borrow, Case 2 Borrow Case 2 will consist of material obtained from sources
provided by the Contractor. The material shall meet the quality requirements determined
by the Engineer unless otherwise provided in the Contract.
102.2.1 General
When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that shown on the
Plans, a pre-construction survey referred to the datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be
undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the excavated materials.
All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No

materials shall be wasted without authority of the Engineer. Excavation operations shall be
conducted so that material outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to
excavation, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed in
accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.
102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil
Where provided for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, suitable topsoil
encountered in excavation and on areas where embankment is to be placed shall be removed
to such extent and to such depth as the Engineer may direct. The removed topsoil shall be
transported and deposited in storage piles at locations approved by the Engineer. The topsoil
shall be completely removed to the required depth from any designated area prior to the
beginning of regular excavation or embankment work in the area and shall be kept separate
from other excavated materials for later use.
102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials
All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the
embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding, and backfill for structures, and for other
purposes shown on the Plans or as directed.
The Engineer will designate as unsuitable those soils that cannot be properly compacted
in embankments. All unsuitable material shall be disposed off as shown on the Plans or as
directed without delay to the Contractor.
Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankments and backfills.
All excess material, including rock and boulders that cannot be used in embankments
shall be disposed off as directed.
Material encountered in the excavation and determined by the Engineer as suitable for
topping, road finishing, slope protection, or other purposes shall be conserved and utilized as
directed by the Engineer.
Borrow material shall not be placed until after the readily accessible roadway excavation
has been placed in the fill, unless otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer. If the
Contractor places more borrow than is required and thereby causes a waste of excavation, the
amount of such waste will be deducted from the borrow volume.
102.2.6 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.
All materials excavated from side ditches and gutters, channel changes, irrigation
ditches, inlet and outlet ditches, toe ditchers, furrow ditches, and such other ditches as may be
designated on the Plans or staked by the Engineer, shall be utilized as provided in Subsection
102.2.3.
Ditches shall conform to the slope, grade, and shape of the required cross-section, with
no projections of roots, stumps, rock, or similar matter. The Contractor shall maintain and keep
open and free from leaves, sticks, and other debris all ditches dug by him until final acceptance
of the work.
Furrow ditches shall be formed by plowing a continuous furrow along the line staked by
the Engineer. Methods other than plowing may be used if acceptable to the Engineer. The
ditches shall be cleaned out by hand shovel work, by ditcher, or by some other suitable method,
throwing all loose materials on the downhill side so that the bottom of the finished ditch shall be
approximately 450 mm (18 inches) below the crest of the loose material piled on the downhill
side. Hand finish will not be required, but the flow lines shall be in satisfactory shape to provide
drainage without overflow.
102.2.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level

Rock shall be excavated to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade within the
limits of the roadbed, and the excavation backfilled with material designated on the Plans or
approved by the Engineer and compacted to the required density.
When excavation methods employed by the Contractor leave undrained pockets in the
rock surface, the Contractor shall at his own expense, properly drain such depressions or when
permitted by the Engineer fill the depressions with approved impermeable material.
Material below subgrade, other than solid rock shall be thoroughly scarified to a depth of
150 mm (6 inches) and the moisture content increased or reduced, as necessary, to bring the
material throughout this 150 mm layer to the moisture content suitable for maximum
compaction. This layer shall then be compacted in accordance with Subsection 104.3.3.
102.2.8 Borrow Areas
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow
areas so that cross-section elevations and measurements of the ground surface after stripping
may be taken, and the borrow material can be tested before being used. Sufficient time for
testing the borrow material shall be allowed.
All borrow areas shall be bladed and left in such shape as to permit accurate
measurements after excavation has been completed. The Contractor shall not excavate beyond
the dimensions and elevations established, and no material shall be removed prior to the
staking out and cross-sectioning of the site. The finished borrow areas shall be approximately
true to line and grade established and specified and shall be finished, as prescribed in Clause
61, Standard Specifications for Public Works and Highways, Volume 1. When necessary to
remove fencing, the fencing shall be replaced in at least as good condition as it was originally.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the confinement of livestock when a portion of the fence
is removed.
102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material
Where the Plans show the top portion of the roadbed to be selected topping, all
unsuitable materials shall be excavated to the depth necessary for replacement of the selected
topping to the required compacted thickness.
Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a subgrade or slopes of

unsuitable soil, the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the unsuitable material and
backfill to the finished graded section with approved material. The Contractor shall conduct his
operations in such a way that the Engineer can take the necessary cross-sectional
measurements before the backfill is placed.
The excavation of muck shall be handled in a manner that will not permit the entrapment
of muck within the backfill. The material used for backfilling up to the ground line or water level,
whichever is higher, shall be rock or other suitable granular material selected from the roadway
excavation, if available. If not available, suitable material shall be obtained from other approved
sources. Unsuitable material removed shall be disposed off in designated areas shown on the
Plans or approved by the Engineer.
The cost of excavation of material which is incorporated in the Works or in other areas of
fill shall be deemed to be included in the Items of Work where the material is used.
Measurement of Unsuitable or Surplus Material shall be the net volume in its original
position.
For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the

difference between the net volume of suitable material required to be used in embankment
corrected by applying a shrinkage factor or a swell factor in case of rock excavation, determined
by laboratory tests to get its original volume measurement, and the net volume of suitable
material from excavation in the original position. Separate pay items shall be provided for
surplus common, unclassified and rock material.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract unit prices all costs of
obtaining land for the disposal of unsuitable or surplus material.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 102.3 shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of
excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item.
102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic Meter

102 (2) Surplus Common Excavation Cubic Meter
102 (3) Surplus Rock Excavation Cubic Meter
102 (4) Surplus Unclassified Excavation Cubic Meter
ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
103.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the necessary excavation for foundation of bridges, culverts,
under drains, and other structures not otherwise provided for in the Specifications. Except as
otherwise provided for pipe culverts, the backfilling of completed structures and the disposal of
all excavated surplus materials, shall be in accordance with these Specifications and in
reasonably close conformity with the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
This Item shall include necessary diverting of live streams, bailing, pumping, draining,
sheeting, bracing, and the necessary construction of cribs and cofferdams, and furnishing the
materials therefore, and the subsequent removal of cribs and cofferdams and the placing of all
necessary backfill.
It shall also include the furnishing and placing of approved foundation fill material to
replace unsuitable material encountered below the foundation elevation of structures.
No allowance will be made for classification of different types of material encountered.
103.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary clearing and grubbing
in that area shall have been performed in accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.
103.2.2 Excavation
(1) General, all structures. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in
advance of the beginning of any excavation so that cross-sectional elevations and
measurements may be taken on the undisturbed ground. The natural ground adjacent to the
structure shall not be disturbed without permission of the Engineer.
Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure footings shall be excavated to the
lines and grades or elevations shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. They shall be
of sufficient size to permit the placing of structures or structure footings of the full width and
length shown. The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the Plans, shall be
considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in
dimensions or elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary, to secure a satisfactory
foundation.
Boulders, logs, and other objectionable materials encountered in excavation shall be

removed.
After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that effect
and no footing, bedding material or pipe culvert shall be placed until the Engineer has approved
the depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material.
(2) Structures other than pipe culverts. All rock or other hard foundation materials shall
be cleaned all loose materials, and cut to a firm surface, either level, stepped, or serrated as
directed by the Engineer. All seams or crevices shall be cleaned and grouted. All loose and
disintegrated rocks and thin strata shall be removed. When the footing is to rest on material
other than rock, excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before the footing is to be
placed. When the foundation material is soft or mucky or otherwise unsuitable, as determined
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and backfill with approved
granular material. This foundation fill shall be placed and compacted in 150 mm (6 inches)
layers up to the foundation elevation.
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be completed before
the piles are driven and any placing of foundation fill shall be done after the piles are driven.
After the driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be removed, leaving a
smooth, solid bed to receive the footing.
(3) Pipe Culverts. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory
jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe.
Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be removed

below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 300 mm or 4 mm for each 100 mm of fill over
the top of pipe, whichever is greater, but not to exceed three-quarters of the vertical inside
diameter of the pipe. The width of the excavation shall be at least 300 mm (12 inches) greater
than the horizontal outside diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be backfilled
with selected fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in
layers not over 150 mm (6 inches) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but yielding
foundation.
Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft,
spongy, or other unstable soil, such unstable soil under the pipe and for a width of at least one
diameter on each side of the pipe shall be removed to the depth directed by the Engineer and
replaced with approved granular foundation fill material properly compacted to provide adequate
support for the pipe, unless other special construction methods are called for on the Plans.
he foundation surface shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the
length of the culvert and, if directed by the Engineer, shall be cambered in the direction parallel
to the pipe centerline.
Where pipe culverts are to be placed in trenches excavated in embankments, the

excavation of each trench shall be performed after the embankment has been constructed to a
plane parallel to the proposed profile grade and to such height above the bottom of the pipe as
shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer.
103.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials
All excavated materials, so far as suitable, shall be utilized as backfill or embankment.

The surplus materials shall be disposed off in such manner as not to obstruct the stream or
otherwise impair the efficiency or appearance of the structure. No excavated materials shall be
deposited at any time so as to endanger the partly finished structure.
103.2.6 Backfill and Embankment for Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with free draining granular
material approved by the Engineer and placed in horizontal layers not over 150 mm (6 inches)
in thickness, to the level of the original ground surface. Each layer shall be moistened or dried
as required and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers.
In placing backfills or embankment, the material shall be placed simultaneously in so far

as possible to approximately the same elevation on both sides of an abutment, pier, or wall. If
conditions require placing backfill or embankment appreciably higher on one side than on the
opposite side, the additional material on the higher side shall not be placed until the masonry
has been in place for 14 days, or until tests made by the laboratory under the supervision of the
Engineer establishes that the masonry has attained sufficient strength to withstand any pressure
created by the methods used and materials placed without damage or strain beyond a safe
factor.
Backfill or embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of concrete culverts or
abutments or rigid frame structures until the top slab is placed and cured. Backfill and
embankment behind abutments held at the top by the superstructure, and behind the sidewalls
of culverts, shall be carried up simultaneously behind opposite abutments or sidewalls.
All embankments adjacent to structures shall be constructed in horizontal layers and

compacted as prescribed in Subsection 104.3.3 except that mechanical tampers may be used
for the required compaction. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action against
the structure and slopes bounding or within the areas to be filled shall be benched or serrated to
prevent wedge action. The placing of embankment and the benching of slopes shall continue in
such a manner that at all times there will be horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted material
for a distance at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall to the backfilled against except
insofar as undisturbed material obtrudes upon the area.
Broken rock or coarse sand and gravel shall be provided for a drainage filter at
weepholes as shown on the Plans.
103.3.1 Structure Excavation
The volume of excavation to be paid for will be the number of cubic meters measured in
original position of material acceptably excavated in conformity with the Plans or as directed by
the Engineer, but in no case, except as noted, will any of the following volumes be included in
the measurement for payment:
(1) The volume outside of vertical planes 450 mm (18 inches) outside of and
parallel to the neat lines of footings and the inside walls of pipe and pipe-arch
culverts at their widest horizontal dimensions.
(2) The volume of excavation for culvert and sections outside the vertical plane
for culverts stipulated in (1) above.
(3) The volume outside of neat lines of under drains as shown on the Plans, and
outside the limits of foundation fill as ordered by the Engineer.
(4) The volume included within the staked limits of the roadway excavation,
contiguous channel changes, ditches, etc., for which payment is otherwise
provided in the Specification.
(5) Volume of water or other liquid resulting from construction operations and
which can be pumped or drained away.
(6) The volume of any excavation performed prior to the taking of elevations and
measurements of the undisturbed ground.
(7) the volume of any material rehandled, except that where the Plans indicate or
the Engineer directs the excavation after embankment has been placed and
except that when installation of pipe culverts by the imperfect trench method
specified in Item 500 is required, the volume of material re-excavated as
directed will be included.
(8) The volume of excavation for footings ordered at a depth more than 1.5 m (60
inches) below the lowest elevation for such footings shown on the original
Contract Plans, unless the Bill of Quantities contains a pay item for
excavation ordered below the elevations shown on the Plans for individual
footings.
103.3.3 Foundation Fill
The volume of foundation fill to be paid for will be the number of cubic meters measures
in final position of the special granular material actually provided and placed below the
foundation elevation of structures as specified, complete in place and accepted.
103.3.4 Shoring, Cribbing, and Related Work
Shoring, cribbing and related work whenever included as a pay item in Bill of Quantities
will be paid for at the lump sum bid price. This work shall include furnishing, constructing,
maintaining, and removing any and all shoring, cribbing, cofferdams, caissons, bracing,
sheeting water control, and other operations necessary for the acceptable completion of 22
excavation included in the work of this Section, to a depth of 1.5 m below the lowest elevation
shown on the Plans for each separable foundation structure.
103.3.5 Basis of Payment
the contract unit price for each of the particular pay items listed below that is included in the Bill
of Quantities. The payment shall constitute full compensation for the removal and disposal of
excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item, except as follows:
(1) Any excavation for footings ordered at a depth more than 1.5 m below the lowest
elevation shown on the original Contract Plans will be paid for as provided in Part K,
Measurement and Payment, unless a pay item for excavation ordered below Plan elevation
appears in the Bill of Quantities.
(2) Concrete will be measured and paid for as provided under Item 405, Structural
Concrete.
(3) Any roadway or borrow excavation required in excess of the quantity excavated for
structures will be measured and paid for as provided under Item 102.
(4) Shoring, cribbing, and related work required for excavation ordered more than 1.5 m
(60 inches ) below Plan elevation will be paid for in accordance with Part K.

103 (1) Structure Excavation Cubic Meter
103 (2) Bridge Excavation Cubic Meter
103 (3) Foundation Fill Cubic Meter
103 (4) Excavation ordered below Plan elevation Cubic Meter
103 (5) Shoring, cribbing, and related work Cubic Meter
103 (6) Pipe culverts and drain excavation Cubic Meter
ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT
104.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of embankment in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or
established by the Engineer.
104.2 Material Requirements
Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in consonance with the

following definitions:
1. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in accordance with the

Contract and which can be compacted in the manner specified in this Item. It
can be common material or rock.
Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of such gradation that all particles will
pass a sieve with 75 mm (3 inches) square openings and not more than 15
mass percent will pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined by
AASHTO T 11. The material shall have a plasticity index of not more than 6 as
determined by ASSHTO T 90 and a liquid limit of not more than 30 as
determined by AASHTO T 89.
2. Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable materials such as:

(a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic materials, such as
grass, roots and sewerage.
(b) Organic soils such as peat and muck.
(c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55.
(d) Soils with natural water content exceeding 100%.
(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower.
(f) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the Engineer.
104.3.1 General
Prior to construction of embankment, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area
shall have been performed in conformity with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.
Embankment construction shall consist of constructing roadway embankments, including

preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed; the construction of dikes within or
adjacent to the roadway; the placing and compacting of approved material within roadway areas
where unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and compacting of embankment
material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the roadway area.
Embankments and backfills shall contain no muck, peat, sod, roots or other deleterious
matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid, bulky materials shall not be placed in
embankment areas where piling is to be placed or driven.
Where shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of the existing
ground shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and to the specified requirements
of this Item.
Where provided on the Plans and Bill of Quantities the top portions of the roadbed in
both cuts and embankments, as indicated, shall consist of selected borrow for topping from
excavations.
104.3.2 Methods of Construction
Where there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that shown on the
Plans, a preconstruction survey referred to the datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be
undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the embankment materials.
When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new

embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built
one-half width at a time, the existing slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right
angles to the roadway shall be continuously benched over those areas as the work is brought
up in layers. Benching will be subject to the Engineer’s approval and shall be of sufficient width
to permit operation of placement and compaction equipment. Each horizontal cut shall begin at
the intersection of the original ground and the vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material thus
excavated shall be placed and compacted along with the embankment material in accordance
with the procedure described in this Section.
Unless shown otherwise on the Plans or special Provisions, where an embankment of
less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below subgrade is to be made, all sod and vegetable matter shall be
removed from the surface upon which the embankment is to be placed, and the cleared
surfaced shall be completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or steeping to a minimum depth
of 150 mm except as provided in Subsection 102.2.2. This area shall then be compacted as
provided in Subsection 104.3.3. Sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disc
harrowed or scarified before construction of embankment. Wherever a compacted road surface
containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (36 inches) of the subgrade, such old road
surface shall be scarified to a depth of at least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by the
Engineer. These scarified materials shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection 104.3.3.
When shoulder excavation is specified, the roadway shoulders shall be excavated to the
depth and width shown on the Plans. The shoulder material shall be removed without disturbing
the adjacent existing base course material, and all excess excavated materials shall be
disposed off as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. If necessary, the areas shall be compacted
before being backfilled.
Roadway embankment of earth material shall be placed in horizontal layers not

exceeding 200 mm (8 inches), loose measurement, and shall be compacted as specified before
the next layer is placed. However, thicker layer maybe placed if vibratory roller with high
compactive effort is used provided that density requirement is attained and as approved by the
Engineer. Trial section to this effect must be conducted and approved by the Engineer. Effective
spreading equipment shall be used on each lift to obtain uniform thickness as determined in the
trial section prior to compaction. As the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous
leveling and manipulating will be required to assure uniform density. Water shall be added or
removed, if necessary, in order to obtain the required density. Removal of water shall be
accomplished through aeration by plowing, blading, discing, or other methods satisfactory to the
Engineer.
Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground that will not support
the mass of trucks or other hauling equipment, the lower part of the fill may be constructed by
dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than
necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent layers.
When excavated material contains more than 25 mass percent of rock larger than 150
mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in layers of the thickness prescribed without
crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods,
such materials may be placed on the embankment in layers not exceeding in thickness the
approximate average size of the larger rocks, but not greater than 600 mm (24 inches).
Even though the thickness of layers is limited as provided above, the placing of
individual rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in diameter will be permitted provided that
when placed, they do not exceed 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided they are carefully
distributed, with the interstices filled with finer material to form a dense and compact mass.
Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling equipment and by
distribution of spalls and finer fragments of earth. Lifts of material containing more than 25 mass
percent of rock larger than 150 mm in greatest dimensions shall not be constructed above an
elevation 300 mm (12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The balance of the embankment
shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm (8
inches) in loose thickness and compacted as specified for embankments.
Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be covered by another
until compaction complies with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over each layer of the
fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction effort afforded thereby and to minimize
rutting and uneven compaction.
104.3.3 Compaction
Compaction Trials
Before commencing the formation of embankments, the Contractor shall submit in

writing to the Engineer for approval his proposals for the compaction of each type of fill material
to be used in the works. The proposals shall include the relationship between the types of
compaction equipment, and the number of passes required and the method of adjusting
moisture content. The Contractor shall carry out full scale compaction trials on areas not less
than 10 m wide and 50 m long as required by the Engineer and using his proposed procedures
or such amendments thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all the
specified requirements regarding compaction can be consistently achieved. Compaction trials
with the main types of fill material to be used in the works shall be completed before work with
the corresponding materials will be allowed to commence.
Throughout the periods when compaction of earthwork is in progress, the Contractor

shall adhere to the compaction procedures found from compaction trials for each type of
material being compacted, each type of compaction equipment employed and each degree of
compaction specified.
Earth
The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all embankment layers and the
material scarified to the designated depth below subgrade in cut sections, until a uniform density
of not less than 95 mass percent of the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T 99
Method C, is attained, at a moisture content determined by Engineer to be suitable for such
density. Acceptance of compaction may be based on adherence to an approved roller pattern
developed as set forth in Item 106, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips.
The Engineer shall during progress of the Work, make density tests of compacted
material in accordance with AASHTO T 191, T 205, or other approved field density tests,
including the use of properly calibrated nuclear testing devices. A correction for coarse particles
may be made in accordance with AASHTO T 224. If, by such tests, the Engineer determines
that the specified density and moisture conditions have not been attained, the Contractor shall
perform additional work as may be necessary to attain the specified conditions.
At least one group of three in-situ density tests shall be carried out for each 500 m of
each layer of compacted fill.
Rock
Density requirements will not apply to portions of embankments constructed of materials

which cannot be tested in accordance with approved methods.
Embankment materials classified as rock shall be deposited, spread and leveled the full
width of the fill with sufficient earth or other fine material so deposited to fill the interstices to
produce a dense compact embankment. In addition, one of the rollers, vibrators, or compactors
meeting the requirements set forth in Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment, shall
compact the embankment full width with a minimum of three complete passes for each layer of
embankment.
104.3.4 Protection of Roadbed During Construction
During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed shall be maintained in such
condition that it will be well drained at all times. Side ditches or gutters emptying from cuts to
embankments or otherwise shall be so constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by
erosion.
104.3.5 Protection of Structure
If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, wing walls, piers or
culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area immediately adjacent to the structure is not
compacted to the extent that it will cause overturning of, or excessive pressure against the
structure. When noted on the Plans, the fill adjacent to the end bent of a bridge shall not be
placed higher than the bottom of the backfill of the bent until the superstructure is in place.
When embankment is to be placed on both sides of a concrete wall or box type structure,
operations shall be so conducted that the embankment is always at approximately the same
elevation on both sides of the structure.
104.3.6 Rounding and Warping Slopes
Rounding-Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes, including the slopes
of drainage ditches, shall be rounded as indicated on the Plans. A layer of earth overlaying rock
shall be rounded above the rock as done in earth slopes.
Warping-adjustments in slopes shall be made to avoid injury in standing trees or marring

of weathered rock, or to harmonize with existing landscape features, and the transition to such
adjusted slopes shall be gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be adjusted and
warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground surfaces without noticeable break.
104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed and Slopes

After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the full width shall be conditioned
by removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compact properly or serve the
intended purpose. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes of depressions shall be
brought to grade with suitable selected material. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other
methods of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted
roadbed shaped to the grades and cross-sections shown on the Plans or as staked by the
Engineer.
All earth slopes shall be left with roughened surfaces but shall be reasonably uniform,
without any noticeable break, and in reasonably close conformity with the Plans or other
surfaces indicated on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefrom
readily discernible as viewed from the road.
104.3.8 Serrated Slopes
Cut slopes in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios between 0.75:1 and 2:1
shall be constructed so that the final slope line shall consist of a series of small horizontal steps.
The step rise and tread dimensions shall be shown on the Plans. No scaling shall be performed
on the stepped slopes except for removal of large rocks which will obviously be a safety hazard
if they fall into the ditchline or roadway.
104.3.9 Earth Berms
When called for in the Contract, permanent earth berms shall be constructed of well
graded materials with no rocks having a diameter greater than 0.25 the height of the berm.
When local material is not acceptable, acceptable material shall be imported, as directed by the
Engineer.
Compacted
Berm Compacted berm construction shall consist of moistening or drying and placing
material as necessary in locations shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer.
Material shall contain no frozen material, roots, sod, or other deleterious materials. Contractor
shall take precaution to prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope. Shoulder
surface beneath berm will be roughened to provide a bond between the berm and shoulder
when completed. The Contractor shall compact the material placed until at least 90 mass
percent of the maximum density is obtained as determined by AASHTO T 99, Method C. The
cross-section of the finished compacted berm shall reasonably conform to the typical
crosssection as shown on the Plans.
Uncompacted Berm
Uncompacted berm construction shall consist of drying, if necessary and placing

material in locations shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. Material shall
contain no frozen material, roots, sod or other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take
precautions to prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope.
The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the volume of material compacted in
place, accepted by the Engineer and formed with material obtained from any source.
Material from excavation per Item 102 which is used in embankment and accepted by
the Engineer will be paid under Embankment and such payment will be deemed to include the
cost of excavating, hauling, stockpiling and all other costs incidental to the work.
Material for Selected Borrow topping will be measured and paid for under the same
conditions specified in the preceding paragraph.
the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities. The payment shall continue full compensation for placing and compacting all
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.

104 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter
104 (2) Selected, Borrow for topping, Case 1 Cubic Meter
104 (3) Selected Borrow for topping, Case 2 Cubic Meter
104 (4) Earth Berm Meter
Item 105 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION
105.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support of overlying
structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. Unless authorized by the Engineer,
subgrade preparation shall not be done unless the Contractor is able to start immediately the
construction of the pavement structure.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except when the subgrade is in rock cut, all
materials below subgrade level to a depth 150 mm or to such greater depth as may be specified
shall meet the requirements of Section 104.2, Selected Borrow for Topping.
105.3.1 Prior Works

Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culverts, cross drains, ducts and
the like (including their fully compacted backfill), ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be
completed. Any work on the preparation of the subgrade shall not be started unless prior work
herein described shall have been approved by the Engineer.
105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances
The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to the allowable
tolerances as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from

design LEVEL OF SURFACE + 20 mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY - 30 mm
MEASURED BY 3-m STRAIGHT 30 m

EDGE
Permitted variation from
design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER
Permitted variation from ± 0.50%
design LONGITUDINAL GRADE
over 25 m length ± 0.50%
105.3.3 Subgrade in Common Excavation
Unless otherwise specified, all materials below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth
150 mm or other depth shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be excavated.
The material, if suitable, shall be set side for future use or, if unsuitable, shall be disposed off in
accordance with the requirements of Subsection 102.2.9.
Where material has been removed from below subgrade level, the resulting surface shall
be compacted to a depth of 150 mm and in accordance with other requirements of Subsection
104.3.3.
All materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth of 150 mm, or to
such greater depth as may be specified, shall be compacted in accordance with the
requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavation
Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after trimming of the rock
excavation shall be leveled by placing specified material and compacted to the requirements of
Subsection 104.3.3.
105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment

After the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be conditioned by
removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compacted properly. The resulting
areas and all other low sections, holes, or depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable
material. The entire roadbed shall be shaped and compacted to the requirements of
Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods of work shall be
performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the
cross-sections shown on the Plans.
105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement
Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing Portland

Cement concrete pavement and if so specified in the Contract the slab be broken into pieces
with greatest dimension of not more than 500 mm and the existing pavement material
compacted as specified in Subsection 104.3.3, as directed by the Engineer. The resulting
subgrade level shall, as part pavement construction be shaped to conform to the allowable
tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2 by placing and compacting where necessary a leveling course
comprising the material of the pavement course to be placed immediately above.
Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing asphalt

concrete pavement or gravel surface pavement and if so specified in the Contract the pavement
shall be scarified, thoroughly loosened, reshaped and recompacted in accordance with
Subsection 104.3.3. The resulting subgrade level shall conform to the allowable tolerances of
Subsection 105.3.2.
105.3.7 Protection of Completed Work
The Contractor shall be required to protect and maintain at his own expense the entire
work within the limits of his Contract in good condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time
he first started work until all work shall have been completed. Maintenance shall include
repairing and recompacting ruts, ridges, soft spots and deteriorated sections of the subgrade
caused by the traffic of the Contractor’s vehicle/equipment or that of the public.
105.3.8 Templates and Straight-edges
The Contractor shall provide for use of the Engineer, approved templates and
straightedges in sufficient number to check the accuracy of the work, as provided in this
Specification.
105.4.1 Measurement of Items for payment shall be provided only for:
1. The compaction of existing ground below subgrade level in cuts of common material
as specified in Subsection 105.3.3.
2. The breaking up or scarifying, loosening, reshaping and recompacting of existing

pavement as specified in Subsection 105.3.6. The quantity to be paid for shall be the
area of the work specified to be carried out and accepted by the Engineer.
105.4.2 Payment for all work for the preparation of the subgrade, including shaping to the
required levels and tolerances, other than as specified above shall be deemed to be
included in the Pay Item for Embankment.
the appropriate contract unit price for Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for the placing or removal and
disposal of all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.

105 (1) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter
(Common Material)
(Existing Pavement)
(Unsuitable Material)
ITEM 106 – COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS
106.1 Description
When specified, this procedure will be used to determine density requirements of

selected embankments, subgrade, bases, and bituminous concrete. The procedure will consist
of control strip construction to establish target densities for the specified course plus use of
sand-cone method of density testing equipment to determine in-place densities obtained during
the construction process.
106.2.1 Compaction Equipment
Compaction equipment shall be capable of obtaining compaction requirements without

detrimentally affecting the compacted material. The equipment shall be modern, efficient
compacting units approved by the Engineer. The compacting units may be of any type, provided
they are capable of compacting each lift of material as specified and meet the minimum
requirements as contained herein. Minimum requirements for rollers are as follows:
1. Sheepsfoot, tamping or grid rollers shall be capable of exerting a force of 45 Newton

per millimeter (250 pounds per inch) of length of roller drum.
2. Steel-wheel rollers other than vibratory shall be capable of exerting a force of not less
than 45 Newton per millimeter of width of the compression roll or rolls.
3. Vibratory steel-wheel rollers shall have a minimum mass of 6 tonnes. The compactor
shall be equipped with amplitude and frequency controls and specifically designed to
compact the material on which it is used.
4. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall have smooth tread tires of equal size that will provide a
uniform compacting pressure for the full width of the roller and capable of exerting a
ground pressure of at least 550 kpa (80 pounds per square inch).
5. Heavier compacting unit may be required to achieve the specified density of the
embankment.
106.2.2 Construction of Control Strips and Determination of Target Density
To determine target density, a control strip shall be constructed at the beginning of work
each course of material to be compacted. Each control strip, constructed to acceptable density
and surface tolerances shall remain in place and become a section of the completed roadway.
Unacceptable control strip shall be corrected or removed and replaced at the Contractor’s
expense. A control strip shall have an area of approximately 335 square meters and shall be of
the same depth specified for the construction of the course which it represents.
The materials used in the construction of the control strip shall conform to the
specification requirements. They shall be furnished from the same source and shall be of the
same type to be used in the remainder of the course represented by the control strip. The
underlying grade or pavement structure upon which a control strip is to be constructed shall
have the prior approval of the Engineer.
The equipment used in the construction of the control strip shall be approved by the
Engineer and shall be of the same type and mass to be used on the remainder of the course
represented by the control strip.
Compaction of control strips shall commence immediately after the course has been
placed to the specified thickness, and shall be continuous and uniform over the entire surface.
Compaction of the control strip shall be continued until no discernible increase in density can be
obtained by additional compactive effort.
Upon completion of the compaction, the mean density of the control strip will be
determined by averaging the results of ten in-place density tests taken at randomly selected
sites within the control strip. The mean density of the control strip shall be the target density for
the remainder of the course which it represents.
If the mean density of the control strip is less than 98 percent of the density of laboratory
compacted specimens as determined by testing procedures appropriate for the material being
placed, the Engineer may order the construction of another control strip.
A new control strip may also be ordered by the Engineer or requested by the Contractor
when:
1. A change in the material or job-mix formula, is made.

2. Ten days of production have been accepted without construction of a new control
strip.
3. There is reason to believe that a control strip density is not representative of the
material being placed.
No measurement for payment will be made for this Item.
Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing the control strip will be considered
incidental to the cost of the work item for which a control strip is required. Payment for the work
item shall be deemed to include compensation for performing the work herein specified and the
furnishing of all materials, labors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct the
density control strip. No payment will be made for any material used in the construction of
unacceptable control strip.
ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL
107.1 Description
Overhaul shall consist of authorized hauling in excess of the free-haul distance.

Freehaul distance is the specified distance that excavated material shall be hauled without
additional compensation. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the free-haul distance shall
be 600 meters.
In determining what constitutes authorized overhaul, it will be assumed that material

taken from excavation will be deposited in embankment after having been hauled the shortest
distance.
The overhaul distance for material obtained and placed within the roadway limits will be
measured along the centerline of the roadway. No allowance will be made for transverse or
lateral movement to or from the centerline except materials moved to or from designated areas
outside the roadway limits; such as Case 1, Borrow Pits, disposal areas, etc. In such case,
measurement shall be along the shortest route determined by the Engineer to be feasible and
satisfactory unless otherwise provided.
If the Contractor chooses to haul material over some other route, and such other route is
longer, the computation for payment shall be based on the overhaul distance measured along
the route designated by the Engineer.
The number of cubic metre-kilometres of overhaul to be paid for shall be the number of
cubic meters of overhaul material multiplied by the overhaul distance in kilometers. The unit
“cubic meter-kilometer” is the amount of hauling required to move one cubic meter a distance of
one kilometer beyond the free-haul distance.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 107.2, shall be paid for the
contract unit price for Overhaul, for the particular Pay Item listed below that is shown on the Bill
of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for overhaul, including all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will not be made for overhaul of Borrow, Case 2, Foundation Fill, bedding
materials and material removed in the rounding of cut slopes when rounding is a separate pay
item.
When the Bill of Quantities does not show estimated quantities for “Overhaul” from the
Pay Item listed below, overhaul will not be directly paid for, but will be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor under other contract items.

107 (1) Overhaul Cubic Meter-kilometer
107 (2) Overhaul of Borrow, Case 1 Cubic Meter-kilometer
PART D
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE ITEM
200 – AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE
200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate subbase
course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades and
cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
Aggregate for subbase shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed
stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or other
finely divided mineral matter. The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and
lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form a
firm, stable subbase.
The subbase material shall conform to Table 200.1, Grading Requirements
Table 200.1 – Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard, mm Alternate US Standard
50 2” 100
25 1” 55 – 85
9.5 3/8” 40 – 75
0.075 No. 200 0 - 12
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two
thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.
The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater
than 35 and plasticity index not greater than 12 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90,
respectively.
The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve, shall have a mass percent of
wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Tests as determined by AASHTO T 96.
The material shall have a soaked CBR value of not less than 25% as determined by
AASHTO T 193. The CBR value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density and determined
by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
200.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Item 105, Subgrade
Preparation, before placing the subbase material.
200.3.2 Placing
The aggregate subbase material shall be placed at a uniform mixture on a prepared

subgrade in a quantity which will provide the required compacted thickness. When more than
one layer is required, each layer shall be shaped and compacted before the succeeding layer is
placed.
The placing of material shall begin at the point designated by the Engineer. Placing shall
be from vehicles especially equipped to distribute the material in a continuous uniform layer or
windrow. The layer or windrow shall be of such size that when spread and compacted the
finished layer be in reasonably close conformity to the nominal thickness shown on the Plans.
When hauling is done over previously placed material, hauling equipment shall be
dispersed uniformly over the entire surface of the previously constructed layer, to minimize
rutting or uneven compaction.
200.3.3 Spreading and Compacting
When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread to the plan thickness, for compaction.
Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the material may be spread and compacted in
one layer.
Where the required thickness is more than 150 mm, the aggregate subbase shall be
spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the
maximum compacted thickness of any layer shall not exceed 150 mm. All subsequent layers
shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner.
The moisture content of subbase material shall, if necessary, be adjusted prior to

compaction by watering with approved sprinklers mounted on trucks or by drying out, as
required in order to obtain the required compaction.
Immediately following final spreading and smoothening, each layer shall be compacted
to the full width by means of approved compaction equipment. Rolling shall progress gradually
from the sides to the center, parallel to the centerline of the road and shall continue until the
whole surface has been rolled. Any irregularities or depressions that develop shall be corrected
by loosening the material at these places and adding or removing material until surface is
smooth and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walls, and at all places not accessible to the
roller, the subbase material shall be compacted thoroughly with approved tampers or
compactors.
If the layer of subbase material, or part thereof, does not conform to the required finish,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make the necessary corrections.
Compaction of each layer shall continue until a field density of at least 100 percent of the
maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method D has been
achieved. In-place density determination shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T 191.
200.3.4 Trial Sections
Before subbase construction is started, the Contractor shall spread and compact trial
sections as directed by the Engineer. The purpose of the trial sections is to check the suitability
of the materials and the efficiency of the equipment and construction method which is proposed
to be used by the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the same material, equipment
and procedures that he proposes to use for the main work. One trial section of about 500 m2
shall be made for every type of material and/or construction equipment/procedure proposed for
use.
After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall carry out such field
density tests and other tests required as directed by the Engineer.
If a trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or procedures in the
Engineer’s opinion are not suitable for subbase, the material shall be removed at the
Contractor’s expense, and a new trial section shall be constructed.
If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure change during the
execution of the work, new trial sections shall be constructed.
200.3.5 Tolerances
Aggregate subbase shall be spread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer
which when compacted will conform to the designed level and transverse slopes as shown on
the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from design

THICKNESS OF LAYER ± 20 mm
Permitted variation from design +10 mm

LEVEL OF SURFACE -20 mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

Measured by 3-m straight-edge 20 mm

CROSSFALL OR CAMBER 20 mm
LONGITUDINAL GRADE over
25 m in length ±0.1%
Aggregate Subbase Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3 ). The quantity to
be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and
accepted in the completed course. No allowance will be given for materials placed outside the
design limits shown on the crosssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but
shall be included in the quantity of subbase herein measured.

the contract unit price for Aggregate Subbase Course which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishings and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

200 Aggregate Subbase Course Cubic Meter
ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
201.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate base course
on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specificaton and the lines, grades,
thickness and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer.
Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of
crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or
other finely divided mineral matter. The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter
and lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form a
firm, stable base.
In some areas where the conventional base course materials are scarce or non-
available, the use of 40% weathered limestone blended with 60% crushed stones or gravel shall
be allowed, provided that the blended materials meet the requirements of this Item.
The base course material shall conform to Table 201.1, whichever is called for in the Bill
of Quantities

Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
50 2” 100
37.5 1-1/2” - 100
25 1” 60 – 85 -
19 ¾” - 60 – 85
12.5 ½” 35 – 65 -
4.75 No. 4 20 – 50 30 – 55
0.425 No. 40 5 – 20 8 – 25
0.075 No. 200 0 – 12 2 – 14
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two
thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.
than 25 and plasticity index not greater than 6 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90,
respectively.
The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have a mass percent of
wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion test determined by AASHTO T 96.
The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a soaked CBR value of not
less than 80% as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR value shall be obtained at the
maximum dry density (MDD) as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting the grading
requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with the base course
material on the road or in a pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall be taken
from sources approved by the Engineer, shall be free from hard lumps and shall not contain
more than 15 percent of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
201.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Item 105, Subgrade
Preparation, before placing the base material.
201.3.2 Placing
It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.2, Placing.
201.3.3 Spreading and Compacting
It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.3, Spreading and
Compacting.
Trial sections shall conform in all respects to the requirements specified in Subsection
200.3.4.
201.3.5 Tolerances
The aggregate base course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes
shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with following:
Permitted variation from design ± 10 mm

THICKNESS OF LAYER
Permitted variation from design + 5 mm
LEVEL OF SURFACE -10 mm

Permitted variation from design ± 0.2%

CROSSFALL OR CAMBER
Permitted variation from design ± 0.1%

25 m in length
Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m 3). The quantity to be
paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in
the completed base course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the design
limits shown on the crosssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be
included in the quantity of aggregate base course.
the contract unit price for Aggregate Base Course which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

201 Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter
ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
202.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed gravel, crushed
stone or crushed rock on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more layers in accordance
with this Specification and lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on the
Plans or as established by the Engineer.
202.2.1 Crushed Aggregate

It shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel crushed to the
size and of the quality requirements of this Item. It shall be clean and free from vegetable
matters, lumps or balls of clay and other deleterious substances. The material shall be of such
nature that it can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable base.
The base material shall conform to the grading requirements of Table 202.1, whichever
is called for in the Bill of Quantities.

37.5 1-1/2” 100
25 1” - 100
19 ¾” 60 – 85 -
12.5 ½” - 60 – 90
4.75 No. 4 30 – 55 35 – 65
0.425 No. 40 8 – 25 10 – 30
0.075 No. 200 2 – 14 5 – 15
The portion of the material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater
than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.
The portion of the material passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit
of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 as determined by AASHTO T 89
and T 90, respectively.
The coarse aggregate retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have a mass percent
of wear not exceeding 45 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test as determined by AASHTO T 96,
and not less than 50 mass percent shall have at least one (1) fractured face.
The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a minimum soaked CBR-
value of 80% tested according to AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value shall be obtained at the
maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method D.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting the grading
requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with the crushed base
course material on the road or in a pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall
be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer, free from hard lumps and not contain more
than 15 percent of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
Same as Subsections 201.3.1 through 201.3.5.

Crushed Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m 3). The quantity
to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and
accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the
design limits shown on the crosssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but
shall be included in the quantity of crushed aggregate base course.
the contract unit price for Crushed Aggregate Base Course which price and payment shall be
full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

202 Crushed Aggregate Base Cubic Meter
Course
ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE
203.1 Description
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course composed of soil aggregate,
lime and water in proper proportions, road-mixed and constructed on a prepared
subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-
sections shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
203.2.1 Soil Aggregate
It shall consist of any combination of gravel, sand, silt and clay or other approved
combination of materials free from vegetable or other objectionable matter. It may be materials
encountered in the construction site or materials obtained from approved sources. The crushed
or uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard, durable stones and rocks, of accepted
quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces or other objectionable
matter. It is the intent of this Specification to utilize soils existing on the roadbed if the quality is
satisfactory. If the quality and/or quantity is deficient, the soil aggregate shall be obtained wholly
or partly from approved outside sources.
The soil-aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of Table 203. 1.

50 2” 100 100
4.75 No. 4 45 – 100 55 – 100
2.00 No. 10 37 – 80 45 – 100
0.425 No. 40 15 – 20 25 – 80
0.075 No. 200 0 – 25 11 – 35
The materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve produced in the crushing operation of
either stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the extent permitted by the
gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall not be less than 4 nor more than 10.
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 as determined by
AASHTO Method T 96.
203.2.1.1 New Soil-Aggregate
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 203.2.1, Soil Aggregate.
203.2.1.2 Salvaged Soil-Aggregate
Where soil-aggregate required is already in place, the Contractor shall not be

responsible for its grading or quality except for removal of oversized materials as directed by the
Engineer. In general, salvaged soil-aggregate to be used for lime stabilized road mix base
course will consist of material meeting the requirements given in Subsection 203.2.1, Soil
Aggregate.
203.2.2 Hydrated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Lime.
203.2.3 Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water
203.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture
The amount of lime to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 3 to 12 mass percent
of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the basis of
preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of materials furnished.
203.2.5 Strength Requirements
CBR Test for Gravelly Soils. The mixture passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have
a minimum soaked CBR-value of 100% tested according to AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value
shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method
D.
Unconfined Compression Test for Finer Textured Soils. The 7-day compressive strength
of laboratory specimen molded and compacted in accordance with ASTM D 1632 to a density of
100% of maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 134, Method B, shall not be
less than 2.1 MPa (300 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633.
203.3.1 Weather Limitations
Lime shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad weather. In the event rain
occurs during the operations, work shall be promptly stopped and the entire section shall be
reconstructed in accordance with this Specification.
203.3.2 Construction Equipment
The equipment to be used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, pulverizing, mixing,
spreading, hauling, watering, finishing and compacting equipment and a slurry lime distributor.
Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer pressure gauge, accurate volume

measuring devices or a calibrated tank. It shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump and
full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically, as well as agitator to prevent setting
of lime solids. These equipment shall be on the project site in good condition and shall have
been approved by the Engineer, both as to type and condition, and provided with experienced
operators before the start of construction.
203.3.3 Preparation of Soil-Aggregate
1. Case 1 (New Soil-Aggregate)
When new soil-aggregate is to be used, the existing roadbed shall be scarified

lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to the crosssection shown on the Plans and shall
then be rolled or watered and rolled, as directed. If so ordered by the Engineer,
depressions shall first be filled and weak portions of the roadbed strengthened with new
soil-aggregate. At least one day shall then be allowed for measuring, sampling and
testing for approval of quantity and gradation before the windrow is spread for
application of hydrated lime. If the surface moisture of the soil-aggregate is more than 2
mass percent of the dry aggregate, the soil aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc
harrows or otherwise aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 percent or less.
The soil-aggregate shall then be spread smoothly and uniformly over half the road or
other convenient width of the surface ready for the application of hydrated lime.
3. Case 2 (Salvaged Soil-Aggregate)

When material in the existing roadbed is to be used for mixing, the surface
shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to the cross-section shown on
the Plans. The reshaped surface shall then be scarified again to the depth ordered by
the Engineer and in such manner as to leave a foundation of undisturbed material
parallel, both in profile and cross-section, the proposed finished surface. The loosened
materials shall be bladed aside into a windrow at the side of the road, and the
undisturbed material roiled, or watered and rolled, as directed.
203.3.4 Application of Lime
The hydrated lime shall be uniformly spread at specified percent using either the dry or
slurry (wet) methods. It shall be distributed in successive applications, in such amount and at
such intervals as directed. The mixing equipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor,
after each application to partially mix the lime with the soil-aggregate.
Dry lime should not be spread under windy conditions to avoid excessive dustings. It
shall be applied only to such areas as can be mixed into the soil-aggregate during the day of
application. Dry application encompass either spotting bags of lime in equal predetermined
transverse and longitudinal intervals or applying bulk lime from suitably equipped self-unloading
trucks. An approved spreader is preferable for uniform distribution.
If lime slurry is employed, the preparation facilities should be approved by the Engineer.
A typical slurry ratio is 1 tonne lime to 2 cubic metre water. The actual mixing proportion
depends upon the percent of lime, specified type of soil and its moisture condition. The slurry is
distributed by one or more passes over a measured area until the specified percentage (based
on lime solids content) is obtained. To prevent run-off and consequent non-uniformity of lime
distribution, the slurry is mixed in immediately after each spreading pass.
203.3.5 Mixing
After the last lime application and partial mixing, the entire mass of the mixture shall be
windrowed on the road surface and then mixed by blading the mixture from side to side of the
road, or by manipulation producing equivalent results, until the whole mass has a uniform color
and the mixture is free from fat or lean spots or balls of unmixed particles. During the mixing
operations, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying course. When directed, the
mixing process shall be confined to part of the width or area of the road so as to allow traffic to
pass.
Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven distribution of lime, the
condition shall be corrected by the addition of soil-aggregate or lime as required and then remix.
If the mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter, as may be encountered
in slurry application method, it shall be bladed, aerated or otherwise manipulated until the
moisture and volatile content are satisfactory. The spreading of the mix shall not be done when
the surface to be covered is in an unsatisfactory condition. At the end of each day’s work, or
when the work is interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose materials, shall be
bladed into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or not, and shall be retained in a windrow
until operations are resumed. When the mixing operations have been satisfactorily completed,
the mixture shall be formed into a windrow of uniform cross-section.
203.3.6 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing

The material shall be spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire blade grader or a
mechanical spreader of approved type. In spreading from the windrow, care shall be taken to
avoid cutting into the underlying course.
After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rolling shall be parallel to the
road center line and shall commence at the outer edges of the road, overlapping the shoulders
and progress toward the center, overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the
width of the roller, except that on superelevated curves rolling shall progress from the lower to
the upper edge. Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to the rear of the
end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface shall be dragged or bladed as
necessary to fill ruts and to remove incipient corrugation or other irregularities. Rolling shall
continue until the surface is of uniform texture and satisfactory compaction is obtained. Initial
rolling shall be performed with a pneumatic tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem-
type steel wheel roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive
pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture.
When the compacted thickness of the road mix lime stabilized base course is to be more
than 150 mm, the mixture shall be spread from the windrow and compacted in two (2)
approximately equal layers, the first layer to be bladed and rolled before the second layer is
spread.
Compaction shall continue until a field density of not less than 100% of the compacted
maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method D has been
attained. Field Density test shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 191.
203.3.7 Protection, Curing and Maintenance
After the lime-stabilized base course has been finished as specified herein, the surface
shall be protected against rapid drying for a period of at least five (5) days by either of the
following curing methods:
1. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by sprinkling with water.
2. Cover the completed surface with a 50 mm layer of earth or sand and maintain in
moist condition.
3. Apply on the surface an asphalt membrane of the type and quantity approved by
the Engineer.
4. Apply on the surface a liquid membrane curing compound of the type and quantity
approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be required to maintain at his own expense the entire work within
the limits of his Contract in good condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first
started work until all work shall have been completed. Maintenance shall include immediate
repairs of any defects that may occur before and after the lime-stabilized base course has been
compacted and finished which work shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense and
repeated as may be necessary to keep the base continuously intact.
Trial sections of the stabilized base shall be constructed at least 2 weeks before actual
base construction. These shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsections 200.3.4,
Trial Sections.
203.3.9 Tolerances
The stabilized base course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes
shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with Subsection 201.3.5,
Tolerance.
203.3.10 Traffic
The Contractor will not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions
prior to the end of five (5) days curing period except pneumatic-tired equipment required for
constructing adjoining sections. Turning areas on completed portions of the base shall be
protected by a layer of stable granular materials of not less than 50 mm of compacted depth.
Lime Stabilized Road Mix base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m 3). The
quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in place as shown on the Plans,
and accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed outside
the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately
but shall be included in the quantity of lime stabilized road mix base course.
the contract unit price for Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and payment shall
be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools

203 Lime Stabilized Road Mix Cubic Meter
Base Course, (New or
Salvaged) Soil-Aggregate
ITEM 204 – PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE
204.1 Description
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface source composed of soilaggregate,
Portland Cement and water in proper proportions, road-mixed and constructed on a prepared
subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-
sections shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
204.2.1 Soil Aggregate
It shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of Subsection 203.2.1.
204.2.2 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
204.2.3 Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water.
204.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture
The amount of cement to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 6 to 10 mass

percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the
basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of the materials furnished by the Contractor.
204.2.5 Strength Requirements
Strength requirements shall conform in all respects to those specified in Subsection

203.2.5.
Construction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed under Subsections

203.3.1 through 203.3.10. In all cases, the word” lime” shall be deleted and replaced with
“Portland Cement”.
Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter
3
(m ). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on
the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials
placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be
measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of Portland Cement Stabilized Road
Mix Base Course.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed, in Section 204.4, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for Portland Cement stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing 53 and placing all materials, including all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

204 Portland Cement Stabilized Cubic Meter
Road Mix Base Course,
(New or Salvaged) Soil-
Aggregate
ITEM 206 – PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE
206.1 Description
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course composed of aggregate,
Portland Cement and water in proper proportions, mixed by a travel plant or in a central plant
and spread and compacted on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more layers, in
accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections
shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Same as Subsections 204.2.1 through 204.2.5
206.3.1 Weather Limitations
Portland Cement shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad weather. In
the event rain occurs, work shall be promptly stopped and the entire section shall be
reconstructed in accordance with this Specification.
206.3.2 Travel Plant Method
The salvaged or new soil-aggregate shall be pulverized until at least 80 mass percent of
all material other than stone or gravel will pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
Any material retained on a 50 mm (2 inches) sieve and other unsuitable material shall be
removed. If additional material is specified, it shall be blended with the existing material. All butt
joints at existing pavements or other structures shall be cleaned prior to mixing.
The subgrade/subbase shall support all equipment required in the construction of the
base course. Soft or yielding areas shall be corrected prior to mixing.
The soil-aggregate to be treated shall be placed in a uniform windrow and spread to a

uniform thickness to the required width. The specified quantity of Portland Cement shall be
applied uniformly in a trench on top of the windrows or spread uniformly over the soil-aggregate.
Spread cement that has been lost shall be replaced, without additional compensation, before
mixing is started.
Mixing shall be accomplished by means of a mixer that will thoroughly blend the cement
with the soil-aggregate. The mixer shall be equipped with a water metering device that will
introduce the required quantity of water during the mixing cycle. The cement soil-aggregate
mixture shall be sufficiently blended to prevent the formation of cement balls when water is
applied.
A maximum time of 2 hours shall be permitted for wet mixing, laydown, and finishing
when this method is used.
206.3.3 Central Plant Method
The soil-aggregate shall be proportioned and mixed with cement and water in a central
mixing plant. The plant shall be equipped with feeding and metering devices which will introduce
the cement, soil-aggregate, and water into the mixer in the quantities specified. Mixing shall
continue until a uniform mixture has been obtained.
206.3.4 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing
The mixture shall be spread on a prepared and moistened subgrade/subbase in a

uniform layer by approved equipment. Not more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the start
of mixing and the time of starting compaction of the spread mixture.
After spreading, the mixture shall be compacted and finished conforming to the
procedures/requirements specified under Subsection 203.3.6, Spreading, Compacting and
Finishing.
The compaction and finishing shall be completed within 2 hours of the time water is
added to the mixture.
206.3.5 Protection, Curing and Maintenance
The completed cement treated base shall be cured with a bituminous curing seal applied
as soon as possible after the completion of final rolling. The surface shall be kept moist until the
seal is applied.
The rate of application shall be between 0.5 L/m2 to 1.00 L/m2 of surface. The exact
rate will be determined by the Engineer. Curing seal will be applied in sufficient quantity to
provide a continuous film over the base. The film shall be maintained at least 5 days unless the
treated base is protected by a subsequent course.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate maintenance of the base at all times
as specified under Subsection 203.3.7, Protection, Curing and Maintenance.
Same as Subsection 203.3.8.
206.3.7 Tolerances
206.3.8 Traffic
Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter
(m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on
the Plans, accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed
outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured
separately but shall be included in the quantity of Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base
Course.
the contract unit price for Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

206 Portland Cement treated Plant Cubic Meter
Mix Course,
(New or Salvaged) Soil-
Aggregate
ITEM 207 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE
207.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and placing aggregate in stockpiles at locations
shown on the Plans or as directed and approved by the Engineer.
The aggregate shall conform to all requirements of the specified Item No. of the
Specifications. It shall be tested for acceptance at the source.
The stockpile area, as staked by the Engineer, shall be graded, shaped and compacted
to a uniform cross-section that will drain satisfactorily. The entire area shall be compacted with a
minimum of three completed passes of the approved equipment.
The stockpiling and handling of aggregates shall be in accordance with clauses 65 and
66, Part H Control of Materials of the latest DPWH Standard Specifications, Volume I,
Requirements and Conditions of Contract.
The quantity of aggregate to be paid for will be the number of cubic meters as ordered
and placed in authorized stockpiles. The stockpiles shall be measured and computed by the
average end-area method. No allowance will be made for settlement or shrinkage.
the contract unit price for Aggregate Stockpile, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and stockpiling the aggregate, including all labor, equipment, tools

207 Aggregate Stockpile Cubic Meter
PART E - SURFACE COURSES
ITEM 300 – AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
300.1 Description
This item shall consist of a wearing or top course composed of gravel or crushed
aggregate and binder material, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities,
constructed on a prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity
with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans.

The aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel
and sand or other fine mineral particles free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of
clay and of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable layer. It
shall conform to the grading requirements shown in table 300.1 when tested by
AASHTO T 11 and T 27.
Alternate
Standard Grading Grading Grading Grading
U. S.
Mm A B C D
Standard
25 1” 100 100 100 100

9.5 3/8 50-85 60-100 - -
4.75 No.4 35-65 50-85 55-100 70-100
2.00 No. 10 25-50 40-70 40-100 55-100
0.425 No.40 15-30 25-45 20-50 30-70
0.075 No. 200 5-20 5-20 6-20 8-25
The coarse aggregate material retained on the 2.00 mm (No.10) sieve shall have a
mass percent of wear by the Los Angeles Test (AASHTO T 96) of not more than 45.
When crushed aggregate is called for in the Bill of Quantities, not less than fifty (50)
mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least
one (1) fractured face.
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No.200) sieve shall not be greater than two-thirds of
the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No.40) sieve.
than 35 and a plasticity index range of 4 to 9, when tested by AASHTO
T 89 and T 90, respectively.
Materials for gravel surface course and crushed aggregate surface course shall have a
soaked CBR Value of not less than 25% and 80% respectively as determined by
AASHTO T 193. The CBR Value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density and
determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
300.3.1 Placing
Aggregate surface course shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Item
201, Aggregate Base Course.
300.3.2 Compacting Requirements

Aggregate surface course shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements of
Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.

Trial sections shall be carried out for aggregate surface course in accordance with the
requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.
300.3.4 Surface Course Thickness and Tolerances
The aggregate surface course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes
shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from +15 mm

design THICKNESS OF LAYER - 5 mm
Permitted variation from +15 mm

design LEVEL OF SURFACE - 5 mm


CROSSFALL OR CAMBER +0.2%
25 m in length +0.1%

Aggregate surface course shall be measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to
be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of aggregate including all filler, placed,
compacted and accepted in the completed course. No allowance will be given for
material placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections
shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantities as measured
above.

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 300.4 shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Aggregate Surface Course which price and payment shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing, handling, placing, watering, and rolling all
materials, including all labor and equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.

300 Aggregate Surface Course Cubic Meter
300 (1) Gravel Surface Course compacted in place
300 (2) Crushed Aggregate

Surface Course
PART F – BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
ITEM 400 – PILING

400.1 Description
400.1.1 Scope
This Item shall consist of piling, furnished, driven or placed, cut and spliced in
accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the
Plans.
The Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance with an itemized list, which will be
provided by the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of all piles. When cast-in-
place concrete piles are specified on the Plans, the Engineer will not furnish the
Contractor an itemized list showing the number and length of piles. When test piles and
load tests are required in conformance with Subsection 400.1.2 and 400.1.3,
respectively, the data obtained from driving test piles and making test loads will be used
in conjunction with other available sub-soil information to determine the number and
lengths of piles to be furnished. The Engineer will not prepare the itemized list of piles
for any portion of the foundation area until all specified loading tests in the Contract
representative of the portion have been completed.
In determining lengths of piles for ordering and to be included for payment, the lengths
given in the order list will be based on the lengths which are assumed to remain in the
completed structure. The Contractor, shall, without added compensation, increase the
lengths to provide for the fresh heading and for such additional length as maybe
necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of operation.
The kind and type of piles shall be as specified on the Plans and Bill of
Quantities. No alternative type or kind of piling shall be used.
400.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles

Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and
Untreated Timber. The specie shall be specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted
on the Plans or Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It shall be free
from loose knots, splits, wormholes, decay, warp, ring separation or any defect which
will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the
Plans may be used for untreated timber and if the specie is not available, a specie of
equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by the Engineer.
Round piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line
drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the
cross-section of the pile at any point more than one percent of the length of the pile.
In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the
center of the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below the bend shall not
exceed four percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 65mm.
Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all rough bark and at least
80 percent of the inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the surface on any
circumference shall be clean wood. No strip of inner bark remaining on the pile shall be
more than 20mm wide and 200mm long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of
the pile.
The pile sizes shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 400.1.
Table 400.1 – Dimension of Piles

Minimum Tip
Length of Pile Diameter (1 metre from the Butt)
Diameter, mm
Minimum Maximum
mm mm 200
Less than 12 metres 300 450 180
12 to 18 metres 320 450 150
More than 18 metres 350 500
The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the pile is
not exactly round, the average of three measurements may be used. For any structure,
the butt diameters for the same lengths of pile shall be as uniform as possible.
Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the Plans.
400.2.2 Treated Timber Piles
Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber.
Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil
mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure process. The process
shall be in accordance with ASTM D-1760 Standard Specification for Pressure
Treatment of Timber Products, but with such changes as temperatures, pressures,
duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final treatment that experience has
shown to be necessary in the treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to
the Philippines. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not
induce excessive checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the
surface of the timber shall be 20 mm. All piles shall retain the minimum amount of
preservative specified in Table 400.2.
Table 400.2 – Minimum Preservative Per Cubic Metre of Wood
Type of Processing
Use
Empty Cell Process Full Cell Process
General Use
195 kg 320 kg
Marine Use
The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to the treatment to determine conformance
with the Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted
free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of
treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote
petroleum mixtures shall be furnished as required for test.
The timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, quantity of free

preservative remaining on the timber and any visual evidence that the treatment has
been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be
determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the
average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2 mm
larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes.
If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge, or
such parts thereof shall be retreated. If after treatment the penetration is still insufficient,
the treated pieces shall be rejected.
400.2.3 Concrete Piles

Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Concrete
shall be Class “C” unless otherwise specified in the Plans.
Concrete shall be proportioned to achieve a range of 6”-8” (150 mm to 200mm) slump,

self-compacting mix.
The use of appropriate plasticizer/additives to assure mix fluidity and consistency shall
be allowed and with the Engineer’s approval. A retardant of proven adequacy and
approved by the Engineer may be used to ensure that early hardening of concrete
during operation will not occur.
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404,

Reinforcing Steel. Prestressing reinforcing steel shall be high-tensile steel wire
conforming to AASHTO M 204 or other high-tensile metals conforming to AASHTO
Standards.
400.2.4 Steel Shells
1. Shells Driven Without a Mandrel

Unless otherwise called for on the Plans or Special Provisions, shells for cast-in-
place concrete piles shall have a minimum 305mm diameter at cut off and a minimum
203mm diameter at tip: made from not less than 4.55mm in thickness plate stock
conforming to AASHTO M 183. Shells may either be spirally welded or longitudinally
welded and may either be tapered or constant in section. Tips shall be sealed as shown
on the Plans.
2. Shells Driven With a Mandrel
The shell shall be of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand driving without
injury and to resist harmful distortion and/or buckling due to soil pressure after driven
and the mandrel removed. Butt and tip dimension shall be as called for on the Plans or
Special Provisions.
400.2.5 Steel Pipes

Filled Steel Pipes (filled with concrete) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
252, Grade 2, Welded and Seamless Pipe Piles. Closure Plates for closed piles shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183.
Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2,
with chemical requirements meeting ASTM Designation A 53, Grade B. The wall
thickness shall not be less than 4.76mm.
400.2.6 Steel H-Piles

Steel H-Piles shall be rolled steel sections of the weight and shape called for on the
Plans. They shall be structural steel meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 183
provided that, where the Special Provisions called for copper bearing structural steel,
the steel shall not contain less than one-fifth percent nor more than zero point thirty five
percent (0.35%) of copper, except that steel by the acid-Bessemer process shall not be
used.
400.2.7 Sheet Piles

Steel sheet piles shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 202 (ASTM A 328), or
AASHTO M 223. All other sheet piles shall meet the requirements prescribed above the
particular material specified. The joints shall be practically water-tight when the piles are
in place.
400.2.8 Pile Shoes

Pile shoes shall be as called for on the Plans.
400.2.9 Splices
Material for pile splices, when splicing is allowed, shall be of the same quality as the
material used for the pile itself and shall follow the requirements given on the Plans.
400.2.10 Paint
It shall conform to Item 709, Paints.
400.3.1 Location and Site Preparation

Piles shall be driven where indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
All excavations for the foundation on which the piles are to be driven shall be completed
before the pile driving, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. After
driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be removed from around
the piles by hand excavation, leaving clean solid surface to receive the concrete of the
foundation. Any requirement for granular fill and lean concrete shall be indicated on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
400.3.2 Determination of Pile Length

Pile length and bearing capacity shall be determined by the Engineer from the results of
the test piling and load tests.
The criterion for pile length may be one of the following:

1. Piles in sand and gravel shall be driven to a bearing power determined by the
use of the pile driving formula or as decided by the Engineer.
2. Piles in clay shall be driven to the depth ordered by the Engineer. However,
the bearing power shall be controlled by the pile driving formula if called for by the
Engineer.
3. Piles shall be driven to refusal on rock or hard layer when so ordered by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the correct pile length and bearing
capacity according to the criteria given by the Engineer.
400.3.3 Pile Driving

All piles shall be driven as shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer.
They shall be driven within an allowed variation of 20mm per meter of pile length from
the vertical or batter as shown on the Plans. The maximum variation at the butt end of
the pile shall be 75mm in any direction from the location shown on the Plans or as
directed by the Engineer. Each pile shall, after driving, be within 150mm from the
theoretical location underneath the pile cap or underneath the superstructure in case of
pile bents. All piles pushed up by the driving of adjacent piles or any other cause shall
be redriven.
Piles shall be used only in places where the minimum penetration of 3m in firm
materials, or 5m in soft materials can be obtained. Whereas soft upper stratum overlies
a hard stratum, the piles shall penetrate the hard materials at sufficient depths to fix the
ends rigidly.
All pile driving equipment is subject to the Engineer’s approval. The Contractor is
responsible for sufficient weight and efficiency of the hammers to drive the piles down to
the required depth and bearing capacity. Hammers shall be gravity hammers, single
and double acting steam or pneumatic hammers or diesel hammers. Gravity hammers
shall not weigh less than 60 percent of the combined weight of the pile and driving head
but not less than 2,000 kg. The fall shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile
and shall in no case exceed 4.50m for timber and steel piles and 2.50m for concrete
piles unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
The plant and equipment furnished for steam hammers shall have sufficient capacity to
maintain, under working condition, the pressure at the hammer specified by the
manufacturer. The boiler or pressure tank shall be equipped with an accurate pressure
gauge and another gauge shall be supplied at the hammer intake to determine the drop
in pressure between the gauges. When diesel hammers or any other types requiring
calibration are used, they shall be calibrated with test piling and/or test loads in
accordance with Subsection 400.1.2, TestPiles.
Water jets shall be used only when permitted in writing by the Engineer. When water
jets are used, the number of jets and the nozzle volume and pressure shall be sufficient
to erode freely the material adjacent to the pile. The plant shall have sufficient capacity
to deliver at all-time a pressure equivalent to at least 690 KPa at two 19 mm (3/4 inch)
jet nozzles. The jets shall be shut off before the required penetration is reached and the
piles shall be driven solely by hammers to final penetration as required by the Engineer.
Piles shall be supported in line and position with leads while being driven. Pile driving
leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of movement of the
hammer, and shall be held in position by guys or steel braces to insure rigid lateral
support to the pile during driving. The leads shall be of sufficient length to make the use
of a follower unnecessary and shall be so designed as to permit proper placing of batter
piles. The driving of the piles with followers shall be avoided if practicable and shall be
done only under written permission from the Engineer.
The method used in driving piles shall not subject them to excessive and undue abuse
producing crushing and spalling of the concrete, injurious splitting, splintering and
brooming of the wood or deformation of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them
into proper position if considered by the Engineer too excessive will not be permitted.
The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or cushions in accordance with
the recommendation of the manufacturer of the pile hammer and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The driving head shall be provided to maintain the axis of the pile with the
axis of the hammer and provide a driving surface normal to the pile.
Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles when permitted, shall
be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 400.3.7 and 400.3.8. All piles shall
be continuously driven unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
Piles shall not be driven within 7 m of concrete less than 7 days old.
400.3.4 Timber Piles

Piles shall be strapped with three metal straps: one about 450mm from the butt, one
about 600mm from the butt, and the third, about 300mm from the tip. Additional straps
shall be provided at about 4.5m on centers between tip and butt. Strapping should
encircle the pile once and be tensioned as tightly as possible. Straps shall be 38mm
wide, 0.8mm thick, cold rolled, fully heat treated, high tensile strapping, painted and
waxed.
Treated piles shall be strapped after treatment.
Point protection shall be considered for all timber piles. Where timber piles must
penetrate dump fill, or may encounter obstructions or be driven to hard strata, point
protection shall be used. A boot that encompasses and utilizes the entire end area of
the pile is preferred.
400.3.5 Timber Pile Bents

Piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to avoid undue bending or
distortion of the sway bracing. Care shall be exercised in the distribution of piles of
various sizes to obtain uniform strength and rigidity in the bents of any given structure.
Cut offs shall be made accurately to insure full being between caps and piles of bents.
400.3.6 Precast Concrete Piles

Precast concrete piles shall be of the design shown on the Plans. Pre-stressed concrete
piles shall be pre-stressed as prescribed in Item 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures.
The piles shall be cast separately and concrete in each pile shall be place continuously.
The completed piles shall be free from stone pockets, honeycombs, or other defects,
and shall be straight and true to the form specified. The forms shall be true to line and
built of metal, plywood or lumber. A 25mm chamfer strip shall be used in all corners.
Form shall be water-tight and shall not be removed until at least twenty-four (24) hours
after the concrete is placed.
Piles shall be cured and finished in accordance with Items 405, Structural Concrete and
406, Prestressed Concrete Structures.
Cylinder specimens shall be made and tested in accordance with Item 405. Piles shall
not be moved until the tests indicate that the concrete has attained a compressive
strength of at least 80 percent (80%) of the design 28-day compressive strength and
they shall not be transported or driven until the design 28-day compressive strength has
been attained.
If testing equipment is not available, as in isolated areas, piles shall not be moved until
after fourteen (14) days after casting and shall not be transported or driven prior to 28
days after casting. If high early strength cement is used, piles shall not be moved,
transported or driven prior to 7 days after casting.
When concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported at the points shown on
the Plans; if not shown, they shall be supported at the quarter points.
400.3.7 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles
1. Drilled Holes
All holes for concrete piles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry to tip elevation shown
on the Plans. All holes will be examined for straightness and any hole which on visual
inspection from the top shows less than one-half the diameter of the hole at the bottom
of the hole will be rejected. Suitable casings shall be furnished and placed when
required to prevent caving of the hole before concrete is placed.
All loose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations have been
completed shall be removed before placing concrete.
The use of water for drilling operations or for any other purpose where it may enter the
hole will not be permitted. All necessary action shall be taken to prevent surface water
from entering the hole and all water which may have infiltrated into the hole shall be
removed before placing concrete.
Concrete shall be placed by means of suitable tubes. Prior to the initial concrete set, the
top 3m of the concrete filled pile or the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is
greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory equipment,
Casing, if used in drilling operations, may be left in place or removed from the hole as
concrete is placed. The bottom of the casing shall be maintained not more than 1.5m
nor less than 0.3m below the top of the concrete during withdrawal and placing
operations unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Separation of the concrete
during withdrawal operations shall be avoided by vibrating the casing.
2. Steel Shells and Pipes

The inside of shells and pipes shall be cleaned and all loose materials removed before
concrete is placed. The concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation from tip to
cut-off elevation and shall be carried on in such a manner as to avoid segregation.
The top 3m of concrete filled shells, or to the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is
greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory equipment.
Pipes shall be of the diameter shown on the Plans. The pipe wall thickness shall not be
less than that shown on the Plans but in no case less than 5mm. The pipe, including
end closures, shall be of sufficient strength to be driven by the specified methods
without distortion.
Closure plates and connecting welds shall not project more than 12.5mm beyond the
perimeter of the pile tips.
No shell or pipe shall be filled with concrete until all adjacent shells, pipes, or piles
within a radius of 1.5m or 4 ½ times the average pile diameter, whichever is greater,
have been driven to the required resistance.
After a shell or pipe has been filled with concrete, no shell, pipe or pile shall be driven
within 6m thereof until at least 7 days have elapsed.
3. Drilled Shafts
Drilled shafts are deep foundations formed by boring a cylindrical hole into soil and/or
rock and filling the hole with concrete. Drilled shafts are also commonly referred to as
caissons, bored piles or drilled piers.
Drilled shafts, like driven piles, transfer structural loads to bearing stratum well below
the base of the structure by passing soils having insufficient strength to carry the design
loads.
Drilled shafts are classified according to their primary mechanism for deriving load
resistance either as floating shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load primarily by side
resistance), or end-bearing shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load primarily by tip
resistance). Occasionally, the bases of shafts are enlarged (i.e., belled or under
reamed) to improve the load capacity of end bearing shafts on less than desirable soils,
or to increase the uplift resistance of floating shafts.
Effects of ground and ground water conditions on shaft construction operations should
be considered and delineated, when necessary, the general method of construction to
be followed to ensure the expected performance. Because shafts derive their capacity
from side and tip resistance which are a function of the condition of the materials in
direct contact with the shaft, it is important that the construction procedures be
consistent with the material conditions assumed in the design. Softening, loosening or
other changes in soil and rock conditions caused by the construction method could
result in a reduction in shaft capacity and an increase in shaft displacement. Therefore,
evaluation of the effects of shaft construction procedure on load capacity must be
considered an inherent aspect of the design.
Drilled shafts are normally sized in 15.24cm (6-inch diameter increments with a
minimum diameter of 45.72cm (18”). The diameter of a shaft socketed into rock should
be a minimum of 15.24cm (6”) larger than the socket diameter. If a shaft must be
inspected by the entry of a person, the shaft diameter shall not be less than 76.20cm
(30”).
Drilled shafts constructed in dry, non-caving soils can usually be excavated without
lateral support of the hole. Other ground conditions where caving, squeezing or
sloughing soils are present require installation of a steel casing or use of a slurry for
support of the hole. Such conditions and techniques may result in loosening of soil
around the shaft, or altering of frictional resistance between the concrete shafts and
surrounding soil.
The center-to-center spacing between shafts is normally restricted to a minimum of 3B

to minimize the effects of interaction between adjacent shafts during construction or in
service. However, larger spacing’s may be required where drilling operations are difficult
or where construction must be completed in very short time frames.
Particular attention should be given to the potential for deposition of loose or wet
material in the bottom of the hole, or the buildup of a cake of soft material around the
shaft perimeter prior to concrete placement. Adequate cleaning and inspection of rock
sockets should always be performed to assure good contact between the rock and shaft
concrete. If good contact along the shaft cannot be confirmed, it may be necessary to
assume that all load is transferred to the tip. If the deposition of soft or loose material in
the bottom of the hole is expected, the shaft may have to be designed to carry the entire
design load through side resistance.
A number of methods can be used to prevent caving during the drilling of holes and the
placement of concrete. It is preferred that drilled shafts be constructed in stable non-
sloughing soil without excessive ground water. If impossible, consider the following
three different construction methods:
a. The construction of the pile or shaft in a wet condition while the walls of the
excavation are stabilized by hydrostatic pressure of water or a mineral slurry until the
concrete is placed by tremie methods for the full length of the pile.
Mineral slurry used in the drilling process shall have both a mineral grain size that will
remain in suspension and sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to transport
excavated material to a suitable screening system. The percentage and specific gravity
of the material used to make the suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability
of the excavation and to allow proper concrete placement. The level of the slurry shall
be maintained at a height sufficient to prevent caving of the hole.
The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and adequate
time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry
tanks will be required when specified. No excavated slurry pits will be allowed when
slurry tanks are required on the project without written permission of the Engineer.
Adequate desanding equipment will be required when specified. Steps shall be taken as
necessary to prevent the slurry from “setting up” in the shaft excavation, such as
agitation, circulation, and adjusting the properties of the slurry.
Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor on the
mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity, and pH. An acceptable range of values for
those physical properties is shown in the following table.
Range of Values (At 20o [68oF])
Property Time of Slurry Time of Concreting Test

(Units) Introduction (In Hole) Method
Density
10.10 to 10.86 10.10 to 11.79 Density
(KN/m3)
64.3 to 69.1 64.3 to 75.0 Balance
(pcf)
Viscosity Marsh
28 to 45 28 to 45 Cone
(sec. per quart)
8 to 11 8 to 11 pH Paper
pH or Meter
Note:
a) Increase density values by 0.314 KN/m3 (2 pcf) in salt water.
b) If desanding is required; sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by volume)
at any point in the shaft excavation as determined by the American Petroleum Institute
sand content test.
Tests to determine density, viscosity and pH values shall be done during the shaft
excavation to establish a consistent working pattern.
Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom and at
intervals not exceeding 3.05m (10 feet) for the full height of slurry. Any heavily
contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of the shaft shall be eliminated.
The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements immediately before shaft
concrete placement.
Excavation Inspection
The Contractor shall provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment of
each shaft excavation. The Contractor under the direction of the Engineer shall
determine the dimensions and alignment of the drilled shaft. Final shaft depth shall be
measured after final cleaning.
The base of the shaft excavation may be cleaned using a cleaning bucket followed by
airlifting. Reverse circulation techniques may also be used to clean the base of the
shaft.
The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50 percent of the base will
have less than 12.5mm of sediment and at no place on the base more than 37.5mm of
sediment. The Engineer will determine shaft cleanliness.
b. The use of steel casing which is installed during drilling operations to hold the
hole open and usually withdrawn during concrete placement.
Casing, if used in operation, shall be metal, smooth, clean, watertight, and of ample
strength to withstand both handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both
concrete and the surrounding earth materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not
be less than the specified size of the shaft. It shall conform to AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A
709) Grade 36 unless otherwise specified.
Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains workable. Generally
the removal of temporary casing shall not be started until concrete placement in the
shaft is at or above ground surface. Movement of casing by rotating, exerting downward
pressure and tapping to facilitate extraction or extraction with a vibratory hammer will be
permitted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line with the
shaft axis.
A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the casing to
overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling fluid outside of the casing.
c. The use of a permanent casing which is left in place within the portion of
the pile which is in unstable material.
A permanent casing is applied as protection from the presence of surface water during
drilling and as support later for the installation of the rebar cage and as a concrete form
in drilling under water.
Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement

The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the Plans plus cage stiffener
bars, spacers, centralizers and any other necessary appurtenances shall be completely
assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft excavation is inspected and
accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement.
Where the reinforcing cage length is too long for placement as a single unit the cage
may be placed in separate units such that appropriate means of splicing the longitudinal
steel is provided for. The Contractor shall submit his plans for such splices to the
Engineer for approval.
The reinforcing steel in the hole shall be tied and supported so that the reinforcing steel
will remain within allowable tolerances until the concrete will support the reinforcing
steel. When concrete is placed by suitable tubes, temporary hold-down devices shall be
used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage during concrete placement. Concrete spacers
or other approved noncorrosive spacing devices shall be used at sufficient intervals not
exceeding 1.50 meters along the shaft to insure concentric location of the cage within
the shaft excavation. When the size of the longitudinal reinforcing steel exceeds 25mm,
such spacing shall not exceed 3.0 meters.
Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection
Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel cage placement.
Concrete placement shall be continuous in the shaft to the top elevation of the shaft.
Placement shall continue after the shaft is full until good quality concrete is evident at
the top of the shaft. Concrete shall be placed through a suitable tube.
For piles less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from the beginning of
concrete placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shall not exceed 2
hours. For piles 2.50 meters and greater in diameter, the concrete placing rate shall not
be less than 9.0 meters of pile height per each 2-hour period. The concrete mix shall be
of such design that the concrete remains in a workable plastic state throughout the 2-
hour placement limit.
When the top of pile elevation is above ground, the portion of the pile above ground
shall be formed with a removable form or permanent casing when specified.
The upper 1.5 meters of concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of 1.5 meter
below the ground surface except where soft uncased soil or slurry remaining in the
excavation will possibly mix with the concrete.
After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft concrete shall be cured
in accordance with the provision in Sub-section 407.3.8 – Curing Concrete.
For at least 48 hours after pile concrete has been placed, no construction operations
that would cause soil movement adjacent to the shaft, other than mild vibration, shall be
conducted.
Construction Tolerances:
The following tolerances shall be maintained in constructing drilled shaft.
a. The drilled shaft shall be within 7.62cm (6”) of the plan position in the
horizontal plane at the plan elevation for the top of the shaft.
b. The vertical alignment of the shaft excavation shall not vary from the plan
alignment by more than 20.83 mm/m (1/4 inch per foot) of depth.
c. After all the shaft concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel cage shall
be no more than 15.24 cm (6”) above and no more than 7.62 cm (3”) below plan
position.
d. When casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less than the shaft
diameter shown on the plans. When casing is not used, the minimum diameter of the
drilled shaft shall be the diameter shown on the plans for diameters 60.96 cm (24”) or
less, and not more than 2.54 cm (1 inch) less than the diameter shown on the plans for
diameters greater than 60.96 cm (24”).
e. The bearing area of bells shall be excavated to the plan bearing area as a
minimum. All other plan dimensions shown for the bells may be varied, when approved,
to accommodate the equipment used.
f. The top elevation of the shaft shall be within 2.54 cm (1 inch) of the plan top of
shaft elevation.
g. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis of the shaft
within 62.5 mm/m (3/4 inch per foot) of shaft diameter. Drilled shaft excavations
constructed in such a manner that the concrete shaft cannot be completed within the
required tolerances are unacceptable.
400.3.8 Steel H-Pile

Steel H-Pile shall consist of structural steel shapes of the sections indicated on the
Plans. When placed in the leads, the pile shall not exceed the camber and sweep
permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles bent or otherwise damaged will be rejected.
The loading, transporting, unloading, storing and handling of steel H-pile shall be
conducted so that the metal will be kept clean and free from damage.
400.3.9 Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles

The tubular steel piles should be or as specified by the Engineer.
The minimum wall thickness shall be as indicated in the following table:
Outside Diameter Less than 355 mm 355 mm and over
Minimum wall thickness 6.5 mm 9.5 mm
Cutting shoes for piles driven open end may be inside or outside of the pipe. They may
be high carbon structural steel with a machined ledged for pile bearing or cast steel with
a ledge, designed for attachment with a simple weld.
400.3.10 Splicing
Splicing when permitted shall be made as shown on the Plans and in accordance with
this Subsection.
1. Precast Concrete Piles

a. By using prefabricated joints mounted in the forms and cast together with the
piles sections and joined together as specified by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer. The joints shall be of the design and type as specified or shown on the Plans.
b. By cutting away the concrete at the end of the pile, leaving the reinforcing steel
exposed for a length of 40 bar diameters for corrugated or deformed bars and 60 bar
diameters for plain bars. The final cut of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis
of the pile. Reinforcement of the same size as that used in the pile shall be spliced to
the projecting steel in accordance with Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, and the necessary
formwork shall be placed, care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile. The
concrete shall be of the same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to placing
concrete, the top of the pile shall be wetted thoroughly and covered with a thin coating
of neat cement, retempered mortar, or other suitable bonding material to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The forms shall remain in place not less than seven (7) days. The pile
shall not be driven until the safe design has been reached.
c. By any other method shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
Curing and finishing of extensions shall be the same as in the original pile.
2. Prestressed Piles
Splicing of prestressed precast piles will generally not be permitted, but when permitted,
it shall be made in accordance with (1) above, but only after driving has been
completed. Reinforcement bars shall be included in the pile head for splicing to the
extension bars. No additional driving will be permitted. The Contractor, at his option,
may submit alternative plans of splicing for consideration by the Engineer.
3. Steel Piles, Shells or Pipes

If the length of the steel pile, shell or pipe driven is insufficient to obtain the specified
bearing power, an extension of the same cross-section shall be spliced to it. Unless
otherwise shown on the Plans, splices shall be made by butt-welding the entire cross-
sections to form an integral pile using the electric arc method. The sections connected
shall be properly aligned so that the axis of the pile shall be straight. Bent and/or
damaged piles shall be rejected.
400.3.11 Cutting Off and Capping Piles

The top of foundation piles shall be embedded in the concrete footing as shown on the
Plans.
Concrete piles shall, when approved by the Engineer, be cut off at such a level that at
least 300mm of undamaged pile can be embedded in the structure above. If a pile is
damaged below this level, the Contractor shall repair the pile to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The longitudinal reinforcement of the piles shall be embedded in the structure
above to a length equal to at least 40 times the diameter of the main reinforcing
corrugated bars (60 diameters for plain bars). The distance from the side of any pile to
the nearest edge of the cap shall not be less than 200mm.
When the cut off elevation for a precast pile or for the steel shell or pile for a cast in
place concrete pile is below the elevation of the bottom of the pile cap, the pile may be
built-up from the butt of the pile to the elevation of the bottom of the cap by means of
reinforced concrete extension constructed in accordance with Subsection 400.3.10 or
as approved by the Engineer. Cut-offs of structural steel piles shall be made at right
angles to the axis of the pile. The cuts shall be made in clear, straight lines and any
irregularity due to cutting or burning shall be leveled-off with deposits of weld metal prior
to placing bearing caps.
400.3.12 Defective Piles

Any pile delivered with defects, or damaged in driving due to internal defects or by
improper driving, or driven out of its proper location, or driven below the elevation fixed
by the Plans or by the Engineer, shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense by one
of the following methods approved by the Engineer for the pile in question:
1. Any pile delivered with defects shall be replaced by a new pile.
2. Additional pile shall be driven/casted at the location as directed by the
Engineer.
3. The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided herein on the
underside of the footing lowered to properly embed the pile.
A precast concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a visible crack, extending
around the four sides of the pile, or any defect which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
affects the strength or life of the pile.
When a new pile is driven or cast to replace a rejected one, the Contractor at his own
expense, shall enlarge the footing as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
400.3.13 Protecting Untreated Timber Trestle Piles

The heads of untreated piles shall be treated as follows:
The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush-coated with two (2) applications of hot
creosote oil or other approved preservative.
400.3.14 Protecting Treated Timber Trestle Piles

All cuts and abrasions in treated timber piles shall be protected by a preservative
400.3.15 Painting Steel Piles

Unless otherwise provided, when required steel piles extend above the ground surface
or water surface, they shall be protected by paint as specified for cleaning and painting
metal surfaces in accordance with Item 403, Metal Structures. This protection shall
extend from the elevation shown on the Plans to the top of the exposed steel.
400.3.16 Pile Records

The Contractor shall keep records of all piles driven or installed. A copy of the record
shall be given to the Engineer within two (2) days after each pile is riven. The record
form to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. The pile records shall give full
information on the following:
Driven Piles Cast-in-Place Piles

1. Pile type and dimension 1. Date of boring or driving (For
2. Date of casting and concrete steel shell) & casting
quality (for concrete piles) 2. Pile type and nominal
3. Date of driving dimension
4. Driving equipment: type, 3. Length of finished pile and tip
weight & efficiency of hammer, elevation
etc. 4. Details of penetration during
5. Description of cushion on pile boring or driving of steel shell
head (driving records as for driven
6. Depth driven and tip elevation piles)
7. Final set for the last 20 blows 5. Concrete quality and consistency
(for every 10 piles and when 6. Time interval between boring
the Engineer so requires the or driving and concreting
penetration along the whole 7. Volume of concrete placed in
depth driven shall be recorded) concrete
8. For gravity and single-acting
hammers: the height of drop
9. For double acting-hammers ---
the frequency of blows
10. Details of any interruption in
driving
11. Level of pile top immediately
after driving and the level
when all piles in the group are
driven
12. Details of re-driving
400.4.1 Timber, Steel and Precast Concrete Piles

1. Piles Furnished
The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in metres of the piles of the
several types and lengths ordered in writing by the Engineer, furnished in compliance
with these Specifications and stockpiles in good condition at the project site by the
Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. The length to be paid for will include test and
tension piles ordered by the Engineer, but not those furnished by the Contractor at his
option. No allowance will be made for piles, including test piles, furnished by the
Contractor to replace piles previously accepted by the Engineer that are subsequently
lost or damaged while in stockpile, or during handling or driving, and are ordered by the
Engineer to be removed from the site of work.
In case extensions of piles are necessary, the extension length will be included in the
length of pile furnished, except for cut off lengths used for extensions and already
measured for payment.
2. Piles Driven
The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in meters of the piles driven in
the completed work measured from the pile tip elevation to the bottom of pile caps,
footings or bottom of concrete superstructure in the case of pile bents. Measurement
will not include additional piles or test piles driven that may be necessary to suit the
Contractor’s method of construction and were driven at his option.
Unless otherwise provided for, preboring, jetting or other methods used for facilitating
pile driving operations will not be measured directly but will be considered subsidiary to
pay items.
400.4.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles

The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of actual lengths in meters of the piles cast
and left in-place in the completed and accepted work. Measurements will be from the
pile tip to the bottom of cap or footing. Portions of piles cast deeper than the required
length through over-drilling will not be measured for payment.
400.4.3 Pile Shoes

The quantity to be paid for, including test pile shoes, will be the number of pile shoes
driven shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer, furnished by the
Contractor in accordance with these Specifications and accepted by the Engineer. Pile
shoes furnished by the Contractor at his option or to replace those that are lost or
damaged in stockpile or handling will not be measured for payment.
400.4.4 Load Tests

The quantity of the load tests to be paid for will be the number of tests completed and
accepted except that load tests made to calibrate different types of hammers, if not
included in the Bill of Quantities, will not be measured for payment.
Anchor and test piling which are not part of the completed structure, will be included in
the unit bid price for each “Load Test”. Anchor and test piling or anchor and test shafts
which are a part of the permanent structure will be paid for under the appropriate Item.
400.4.5 Splices
The quantity to be paid for will be the number of splices which may be required to drive
the pile in excess of the estimated length shown on the Plans for cast-in-place steel
pipes or shells or in excess of the order length furnished by the Engineer for all other
types of piling. Splices made for the convenience of the Contractor or to fabricate piles
cut offs will not be paid for.

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 400.4 shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that is included in the
Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment tools and incidentals as well as
temporary works, staging areas or crane way necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measurement
400 (1) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Meter
400 (2) Treated Timber Piles, preservative, furnished Meter
400 (3) Steel H-Piles, furnished Meter
400 (4) Precast Concrete Piles, furnished Meter
400 (5) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished Meter
400 (6) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400 (7) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400 (8) Untreated Timber Piles, driven Meter
400 (9) Treated Timber Piles, driven Meter
400 (10) Steel H-Piles, driven Meter
400 (11) Steel Pipes Piles Meter
400 (12) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (13) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (14) Precast Concrete Piles, driven Meter
400 (15) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, driven Meter
400 (16) Test Piles, furnished and driven Meter
400 (17) Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes Meter
400 (18) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells Meter
400 (19) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes Meter
400 (20) Pile Shoes Each
400 (21) Splices Each
400 (22) Load Tests Each
400 (23) Bored Piles (dia. __m) Meter
400 (24) Permanent Casing (dia. ___m) Meter
ITEM 401 – RAILINGS
401.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing or fabricating and/or placing railings, for bridges and
other structures of the material or combination of materials shown on the Plans,
constructed in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and to the lines,
grades and dimensions shown on the Plans. Railings shall be classified as concrete,
steel, aluminum or timber in accordance with the predominating material contained in
each.
401.2.1 Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Item 405, Structural
Concrete.
401.2.2 Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
401.2.3 Steel
Structural steel consisting of steel and iron plates, shapes, pipes, fittings and castings
shall conform to the requirements of Item 403, Metal Structures.
401.2.4 Aluminum
It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 193, ASTM B 221 or ASTM B 308 or
as called for on the Plans.
401.2.5 Timber
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber.
401.2.6 Stones and Bricks

These shall conform to the requirements of Item 505, Stone Masonry and Item 704,
Masonry Units.
401.2.7 Paint
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints.
401.3.1 General
Railings shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the Plans and shall not
reflect any unevenness in the structure. All railing posts shall be set plumb in hand or
mechanically dug holes, unless driving is permitted. In the latter case, the manner of
driving shall be such as to avoid battering or distorting of post. Post holes shall be
backfilled with acceptable material placed in layers and thoroughly compacted. When it
is necessary to cut post holes in existing pavement, all loose materials shall be removed
and the paving replaced in kind. Bridge railings shall not be placed on a span until
centering or false work has been removed, rendering the span self-supporting.
Rail elements shall be erected according to Plans and in a manner resulting in a

smooth, continuous installation with laps in the direction of traffic flow. All bolts except
adjustment bolts shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond
the nuts by more than 25 mm.
Where painting of railing component is specified, any damage to the shop coat of paint
shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive primer prior to
painting. Ungalvanized surfaces inaccessible to painting after erection shall be field
painted before erection. The railing components shall be given the specified number of
coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing or by approved pressure spray.
Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base metal is exposed,
threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be painted with
two (2) coats of zinc-dust and zinc oxide paint.
401.3.2 Metal Railing

Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Item 403,
Metal Structures. In the case of welded railings, all exposed joints shall be finished by
grinding or filing after welding to give a neat appearance.
Metal railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in-place to insure proper matching
of abutting joints, correct alignment and camber throughout their length. Holes for field
connection shall be drilled with the railing in-place in the structure at proper grade and
alignment. Welding may be substituted for rivets or bolts in field connections with the
approval of the Engineer.
401.3.3 Concrete Railing

1. Railing Cast-In-Place
The portion of the railing or parapet which is to be cast-in-place shall be constructed in
accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Special care shall
be exercised to secure smooth and tight fitting forms which can be rigidly held in line
and grade and removed without injury to the concrete.
Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with suitable material to
have a smooth surface which shall meet the approval of the Engineer or as shown on
the Plans.
All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be constructed according to the detailed
Plans with metered joints, and all corners in the finished work shall be true, sharp and
clean-cut and shall be free from cracks, spalls and other defects.
2. Precast Railings
Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from the molds as soon as
practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at least ten (10) days. Any member
that shows checking of soft corners of surfaces shall be rejected.
Expansion joints shall be constructed as to permit freedom of movement. After all work
is completed, all loose or thin shells of mortar likely to spall under movement shall be
carefully removed from all expansion joints by means of a sharp chisel.
401.3.4 Wooden Railing

Wooden railing shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Item 402,
Timber Structures.
401.3.5 Stone and Brick Railing

The materials used in masonry brick railing and parapet and the work to be done shall
conform to the requirements of this Specification. The workmanship shall be first class
and the finished construction shall be neat in appearance and true to line and grade.

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of specified railing
actually completed and accepted measured from center to center of end posts.

The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 401.4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Railing, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
401 Railing Meter
ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES
402.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of timber structures to the dimensions,
lines and grades as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer in
accordance with these Specifications. The timber shall be treated or untreated as
called for on the Plans or Special Provisions.
402.2.1 Timber
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber.
402.2.2 Hardware
All hardware shall be of the kind and size specified on the Plans. All bolts, including
drift bolts, shall be either wrought iron or medium steel. Washers shall be either
ogee gray iron casting or malleable cast iron unless cut washers are specified on
the Plans.
Bolts shall have square heads and nuts, unless otherwise specified. Nails shall be
cut or round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be cut wire or spikes, or boat
spikes, as specified. All hardware shall be galvanized in conformity with AASHTO M
232 or cadmium plated per ASTM M 165 Type OS, unless otherwise specified on
the Plans or Special Provisions.
402.2.3 Paint
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints or Item 411, Paint.
402.2.4 Structural Steel
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal.
402.2.5 Preservatives
The preservative shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as called for
on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the Specifications
for timber preservatives of the AASHTO M 133.
When timber is intended for marine use, creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be
used.
402.3.1 Storage of Materials
All timber which is to be stored on the job for any length of time prior to its use in the
structure shall be neatly stacked in piles to prevent warping or distortion. Untreated
timber shall be open-stacked at least 300mm above the ground and the stack shall
be sloped so as to shed water. Creosote- treated timber shall be close-stacked and
piled to prevent warping. The ground under-neath and in the vicinity of all material
piles shall be cleared of all weeds and rubbish.
402.3.2 Treated Timber

All treated timber shall be framed prior to treating. Care shall be exercised in
handling all treated timber so as not to break or penetrate the treatment with any
tool or handling equipment. Any piece of timber that has been damaged by the
Contractor shall be replaced by him without extra compensation.
Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that shall expose untreated wood shall
be given three coats of hot creosote or carbolineum before the exposed part is
assembled.
402.3.3 Timber Treatment
Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosote-petroleum

oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure process. The
treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive
checking.
The minimum penetration of the preservative with the surface of the timber shall be
20mm. The minimum retention of preservative per cubic metre of timber shall be as
follows:
For general use, 195 kg by empty cell process
For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process
The Engineer shall be notified at least ten (10) days in advance of the date that the
treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber, the treatment
process, and the finished treated timber may all be inspected. The Engineer will
inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine conformance with the
Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free
access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and types
of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote-
petroleum mixture shall be furnished as required for tests.
After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to determine

penetration of treatment, amount of checking, quantity of free preservative
remaining of the timber and any other visual evidence that the treatment has been
performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be
determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the
average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2mm
larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes.
If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire
charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Engineer or his authorized
representative to be unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment, the
penetration is still insufficient, the retreatment pieces shall be rejected.
Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause for rejection
of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs.
The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and pressure
gages so that the process can be accurately controlled and a continuous record
made of stages of the treating process. If requested by the Engineer, records shall
be furnished showing the duration, maximum and minimum temperatures and
pressures used during all stages of the process.
402.3.4 Untreated Timber
In structures of untreated timber, all of the following surfaces shall be coated

thoroughly with two (2) coats of hot creosote oil or carbolineum before the timber
are assembled: ends, tops and all contact surfaces of posts, sills, caps, floor beams
and stringers, all ends, joints and contact surfaces of bracing. The back surface of
all bulkheads and any other timber in direct contact with earth shall be similarly
treated.
402.3.5 Bolts and Washers
Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads and nuts
that would otherwise be in contact with wood. Cast iron washers shall have a
thickness equal to one fourth the diameter of the bolt and the diameter of the
washer shall be four times its thickness. For malleable or plate washers, the
diameter or side size of the square shall be equal to four times the diameter of the
bolt. Cap washers shall be used when the timber is in contact with earth. All nuts
shall be checked effectively after being finally tightened.
402.3.6 Pile Bents
The pile shall be driven as indicated on the Plans, with a variation of the portion
above the ground of not more than 6mm per 300mm from the vertical or batter
indicated, or so that the cap may be placed in its proper location without inducing
excessive stresses on the piles. Excessive manipulation of piles will not be
permitted and the Contractor will be required to redrive or use other satisfactory
methods to avoid such manipulations. No shimming on tops of piles will be
permitted.
The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size and quality to avoid
undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. However, care shall be exercised
in the distribution of piles of various sizes to secure uniform strength and rigidity in
the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be accurately made to insure perfect
hearing between caps and piles.
402.3.7 Frame Bents
Concrete pedestal for the support of framed bents shall be finished carefully so that
sills or posts will take even bearing on them. Dowels for anchoring sills or posts
shall be set the concrete is cast and shall project at least 150mm above the tops of
the pedestals.
Sills shall have true and even bearing on piles or pedestals. They shall be drift-
bolted with bolts extending into the piles or pedestals at least 150mm. When
possible, all earth shall be removed from contact with sills so that there will be free
circulation of air around the sills.
402.3.8 Caps
Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing over the tops of the
supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment. All caps shall be secured by
driftbolts, set approximately at the center extending at least 230mm into the post or
piles.
402.3.9 Bracing
Bracing shall be bolted through at intersections to the pile, posts, caps or sills.
402.3.10 Stringers
Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so that knots
near the edges will be in the top portions of the stringers. Outside stringers may
have butt joints but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the full
width of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringers
shall be securely fastened to caps by driftbolts. When stringers are two panels in
length, the joints shall be staggered. Cross-bridging between stringers shall be
neatly and accurately framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two nails at each
end. All cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at each end against the
sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified, cross bridging shall be placed at the
center of each span.
402.3.11 Plank Floors

Roadway and sidewalk floor planks, unless otherwise stipulated, shall be
surfaced one side and one edge (SISIE). The planks shall be laid heartside
down, with 7mm openings between them for seasoned materials and with
tight joints for unseasoned material. Each plank shall be spiked securely to
each joint or supporting member. The planks shall be graded carefully as to
thickness, and so laid that no two adjacent planks shall vary in thickness by
more than 1.6mm.
402.3.12 Laminated or Strip Floors
Planks for laminated or strip floors shall have a nominal thickness of 50mm and
shall be surfaced to a uniform width (SIE), and when so specified, to a uniform
thickness (SIS). Unless otherwise stipulated, no splicing of planks will be allowed.
Planks shall be laid with the surfaced edge down and each plank shall be toe-nailed
to each alternative stringer. The nailing of successive planks shall be staggered so
that the spacing of nails along each stringer shall not be less than 100mm. In
addition, each piece shall be nailed horizontally to adjacent pieces at 450mm
centers, and staggered both horizontally and vertically with nails in adjacent pieces.
All floors shall be cut to a straight line along the sides of the roadway.
402.3.13 Railing and Rail Posts
Railing and rail posts shall be built as shown on the Plans and shall be constructed
in a workmanlike and substantial manner. All railing and rail post materials shall be
surfaced on four sides (S4S). All rails shall be continuous and squarely butt-joined
at the post.
402.3.14 Wheel Guards
Wheel guards shall be accurately constructed true to line and grade in accordance
with the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced on one side and one
edge (SISIE). Wheel guards shall be laid in sections not less than 3.60mm long.
Timber structures shall be measured by the completed span and shall include all
materials, equipment and labor used to finish the structure as called for in the Bid,
Plans and Specifications.

Payment for the timber structure measured in Section 402.4, Method of
Measurement, shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials,
preservative treatment, if called for in the Contract, equipment, hardware and other
metal parts, tools and labor necessary for the completion of the structure and
painting, if required in a satisfactory manner and all incidentals necessary to
complete the Item.
402 (1) Timber Structure Span
ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES
403.1 Description
This work shall consist of steel structures and the steel structure portions of
composite structures, constructed in reasonably close conformity with the lines,
grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
The work will include the furnishing, fabricating, hauling, erecting, welding and
painting of structural metals called for in the Special Provision or shown on the
Plans. Structural metals will include structural steel, rivet, welding, special and alloy
steels, steel forgings and castings and iron castings. This work will also include any
incidental metal construction not otherwise provided for, all in accordance with
these Specifications, Plans and Special Provisions.
Materials shall meet the requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal; Item 409,
Welded Structural Steel, and Item 409, Welded Structural Steel; and Item 709,
Paints.
403.3.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior to the
beginning of work at the mill or shop, so that the required inspection may be made.
The term “mill” means any rolling mill, shop or foundry where material for the work
is to be manufactured or fabricated. No material shall be rolled or fabricated until
said inspection has been provided.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the certified mill reports of
the structural steel, preferably before but not later than the delivery of the steel to
the job site.
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the Engineer shall be
allowed free access to the mill or shop and premises at all times. The Contractor
shall furnish, without charge, all labor, machinery, material and tools necessary to
prepare test specimens.
Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and
avoiding errors and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the Contractor
from any responsibility for imperfect material or workmanship and the necessity for
replacing same. The acceptance of any material or finished member at the mill or
shop by the Engineer shall not preclude their subsequent rejection if found defective
before final acceptance of the work. Inspection of welding will be in accordance with
the provision of Section 5 of the “Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in
Building Construction” of the American Welding Society.
403.3.2 Stock Material Control
When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into classes
designated as “identified” or “unidentified”. Identified material is material which can
be positively identified as having been rolled from a given heat for which certified
mill test can be produced. Unidentified material shall include all other general stock
materials. When it is proposed to use unidentified material, the Engineer shall be
notified of such intention at least fifteen (15) days in advance of commencing
fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When so indicated or directed, the
Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use from stock, and place it in
such position that it will be accessible for inspection and sampling. The Contractor
shall select identified material from as few heat numbers as possible, and furnish
the certified mill test reports on each of such heat numbers. Two samples shall be
taken from each heat number as directed, one for a tension test and one for a bend
test.
In the case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his discretion, select any
number of random test specimens.
Each bin from which rivets or bolts are taken shall subject to random test. Five
rivets or bolts may be selected by the Engineer from each bin for test purposes.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon
platforms, skids, or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease, or other
foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from corrosion.
403.3.3 Fabrication
These Specifications apply to riveted, bolted and welded construction. The

Contractor may, however, with approval of the Engineer, substitute high tensile
strength steel bolts equivalent to the rivets in any connection.
Workmanship and finish shall be in accordance with the best general practice in
modern bridge shops. Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly.
Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon
platforms, skids or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease or other
foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from corrosion.
Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If straightening is
necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the metal. Sharp kinks
and bends will be cause for rejection of the material.
Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS (American Welding

Society) D 1.1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for
Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges.
403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.
Edge Planing
Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in thickness and carrying calculated
stresses shall be planed to a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted
before cutting.
Facing of Bearing Surfaces
The surface finish of bearing and based plates and other bearing surfaces that are
to come in contact with each other or with concrete shall meet the American
National Standards Institute surface roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B-
46.1-47, Surface Roughness Waviness and Lay, Part I:
Steel slabs ANSI 2,000
Heavy plates in contact in shoes

to
Be welded ANSI 1,000
Milled ends of compression

members, ANSI 500
stiffeners and fillers
Bridge rollers and rockers ANSI 250
Pins and pin holes ANSI 125
Sliding bearings ANSI 125
Abutting Joints
Abutting joints in compression members and girders flanges, and in tension

members where so specified on the drawings, shall be faced and brought to an
even bearing. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not exceed 6.3 mm.
End Connection Angles
Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles shall be
built to plan length back to back of connection angles with a permissible tolerance
of 0 mm to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the finished thickness of
the angles shall not be less than that shown on the detail drawings, but in no case
less than 9.5 mm.
Lacing Bars
The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another form is
required.
Fabrication of Members
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for main members and
splice plates for flanges and main tension members, not secondary members, shall
be cut and fabricated so that the primary direction of rolling is parallel to the
direction of the main tensile and/or compressive stresses.
Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and
open joints.
Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted)

In girders having no cover plates and not to be encased in concrete, the top
edges of the web shall not extend above the backs of the flange angles and shall
not be more than 3.2 mm below at any point. Any portion of the plate projection
beyond the angles shall be chipped flush with the backs of the angles. Web plates
of girders having cover plates may not be more than 12.7 mm less in width than the
distance back to back of flange angles.
Splices in webs of girders without cover plates shall be sealed on top with
red lead paste prior to painting.
At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the plates shall not
exceed 9.5 mm. The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the web slice plates
shall not exceed 6.3 mm.
Bent Plates
Cold-bent load-carrying rolled-steel plates shall conform to the following:
They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bendline will be at right angles
to the direction of rolling, except that cold-bent ribs for orthotropic deck bridges may
be bent in the direction of rolling if permitted by the Engineer.
The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of the plate occurs. Minimum
bend radii, measured to the concave face of the metal, are shown in the following
table:
ASTM THICKNESS, t in mm
DESIG- Up to Over 6.3 Over 12.7 Over 25.4 Over 38.1

ATION 6.3 To 12.7 To 25.4 to 38.1 to 50.08
A36 1.5t 1.5t 2t 3t 4t
A242 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
A440 2.5t 3.5t 6t a--- a---
A441 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
A529 2t 2t ---- ---- ----
Gr.42 2t 2t 3t 4t 5t
Gr.45 2t 2t 3t 4t ----
Gr.50 2.5t 2.5t 4t a--- ----
Gr.55 3t 3t 5t a--- ----
Gr.60 3.5t 3.5t 6t ---- ----
Gr.65 4t 4t ---- ---- ----

A572
A588 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
A514b 2t 2t 3t 3t
It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot. Hot bending
however, may result in a slight decrease in the as-rolled mechanical properties.
The mechanical properties of ASTM A 514 steel results from a quench-and-temper-

operation. Hot bending may adversely affect these mechanical properties. If
necessary to hotbend, fabricator should discuss procedure with steel supplier.
Before bending, the corners of the plate be rounded to a radius of 1.6 mm

throughout that portion of the plate where the bending is to occur.
Fit of Stiffeners
End stiffeners of girders and stiffeners intended as supports for concentrated loads
shall have full bearing (either milled, ground or on weldable steel in compression
areas of flanges, welded as shown on the Plans or specified) on the flanges to
which they transmit load or from which they receive load. Stiffeners not intended to
support concentrated loads shall, unless shown or specified otherwise, fit
sufficiently tight to exclude water after being painted, except that for welded flexural
members, the ends of stiffeners adjacent to the tension flanges shall be cut back
as shown on the Plans. Fillers under stiffeners shall fit within 6.3 mm at each end.
Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions. Brackets, clips, gussets, stiffeners, and other detail material
shall not be welded to members or parts subjected to tensile stress unless
10. Eyebars
Pin holes may be flame cut at least 50.8 mm smaller in diameter than the finished
pin diameter. All eyebars that are to be placed side by side in the structure shall be
securely fastened together in the order that they will be placed on the pin and bored
at both ends while so clamped. Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for
shipment and erection. All identifying marks shall be stamped with steel stencils on
the edge of one head of each member after fabrication is completed so as to be
visible when the bars are nested in place on the structure. The eyebars shall be
straight and free from twists and the pin holes shall be accurately located on the
centerline of the bar. The inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss shall not
exceed 1.6 mm to 305 mm.
The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of their pin holes
shall be cut simultaneously with two mechanically operated torches abreast of each
other, guided by a substantial template, in such a manner as to prevent distortion of
the plates.
11. Annealing and Stress Relieving
Structural members which are indicated in the Contract to be annealed or

normalized shall have finished machining, boring and straightening done
subsequent to heat treatment. Normalizing and annealing (full annealing) shall be in
accordance with ASTM E 44. The temperatures shall be maintained uniformly
throughout the furnace during heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two
points on the member will differ by more than 37.8 0C at any one time.
Members of A514/A517 steels shall not be annealed or normalized and shall be

stress relieved only with the approval of the Engineer.
A record of each furnace charge shall identify the pieces in the charge and show
the temperatures and schedule actually used. Proper instruments including
recording pyrometers, shall be provided for determining at any time the
temperatures of members in the furnace. The records of the treatment operation
shall be available to and meet the approval of the Engineer.
Members, such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or others which are built up by welding
sections of plate together shall be stress relieved in accordance with the provisions
of Subsection 403.3.11 when required by the Plans, Specifications or Special
Provisions governing the Contract.
12. Tests
When full size tests of fabricated structural members or eyebars are required by the
Contract, the Plans or Specifications will state the number and nature of the tests,
the results to be attained and the measurements of strength, deformation or other
performances that are to be made. The Contractor will provide suitable facilities,
material, supervision and labor necessary for making and recording the tests. The
members tested in accordance with the Contract will be paid for in accordance with
Subsection 403.3.5.1. The cost of testing, including equipment handling,
supervision labor and incidentals for making the test shall be included in the
contract price for the fabrication or fabrication and erection of structural steel,
whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless otherwise specified.
403.3.5 Pins and Rollers
Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on the Plans
and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. Pins and rollers more 228.6 mm
or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed. Pins and rollers 228.6 mm
or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed or cold-finished carbon-steel
shafting.
In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than 50.8 mm in diameter
shall be bored full length along the axis after the forging has been allowed to cool to
a temperature below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent injury by
too rapid cooling and before being annealed.
Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and straight, at right
angles with the axis of the member and parallel with each other unless otherwise
specified. The final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut.
The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to inside of
holes in compression members shall not vary from that specified more than 0.8 mm.
Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done after the riveting is completed.
The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more than 0.51 mm
for pins 127 mm or less in diameter, or 0.8 mm for larger pins.
The pilot and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall be furnished, unless
otherwise specified.
403.3.6 Fastener Holes (Rivets and Bolts)
All holes for rivets or bolts shall be either punched or drilled. Material
forming parts or a member composed of not more than five thickness of
metal may be punched 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets
or bolts whenever the thickness of the material is not greater than 19 mm for
structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength steel or 12.7 mm for quenched
and tempered alloy steel, unless subpunching and reaming is required for
field connections.
When there are more than five thicknesses or when any of the main
material is thicker than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength
steel, or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, all holes shall
either be subdrilled or drilled full size.
When required for field connections, all holes shall either be

subpunched or subdrilled (subdrilled if thickness limitation governs) 4.8 mm
smaller and, after assembling, reamed 1.6 mm larger or drilled full size 1.6
mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts.
When permitted by design criteria, enlarged or slotted holes are

allowed with high-strength bolts. For punched holes, the diameter of the die
shall not exceed the diameter of the punch by more than 1.6 mm. If any holes
must be enlarged to admit the fasteners, they shall be reamed. Holes shall
be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of holes will be
cause for rejection.
Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member, and

not more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners.
Where practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical means. Drilled
holes shall be 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners.
Burrs on the outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor matching of holes will
be cause for rejection. Reaming and drilling shall be done with twist drills. If
required by the Engineer, assembled parts shall be taken apart for removal of
burrs caused by drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or drilled holes
shall be assembled and securely held while being reamed or drilled and shall
be matchmarked before disassembling.
Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connections and field
splices of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, towers (each
face), bents, plate girders and rigid frames shall be subpunched (or subdrilled
if subdrilling is required) and subsequently reamed while assembled in the
shop in accordance with Subsection 403.3.7.
All holes for floor-beam and stringer field end connections shall be
subpunched and reamed to a steel template reamed while being assembled.
Reaming or drilling full size of field connection through templates shall

be done after templates have been located with the utmost care as to
position and angle and firmly bolted in place. Templates used for the reaming
of matching members, or of the opposite faces of one member, shall be exact
duplicated.
Templates for connections which duplicate shall be so accurately located that

like members are duplicates and require no matchmarking.
If additional subpunching and reaming is required, it will be specified in

the Special Provisions or on the Plans.
Alternately, for any field connection or splice designated above in lieu

of sub-sized holes and reaming while assembled, or drilling holes full-size
while assembled, the Contractor shall have the option to drill bolt holes full-
size in unassembled pieces and/or connections including templates for use
with matching sub-sized and reamed holes means of suitable numerically-
controlled (N/C) drilling equipment subject to the specific provisions
contained in this Subsection.
If N/C drilling equipment is used, the Engineer, unless otherwise stated

in the Special Provisions or on the Plans, may require the Contractor, by
means if check assemblies to demonstrate that this drilling procedure
consistently produces holes and connections meeting the requirements of
conventional procedures.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed

outline of the procedures that he proposes to follow in accomplishing the
work from initial drilling through check assembly, if required, to include the
specific members of the structure that may be N/C drilled, the sizes of the
holes, the location of common index and other reference points, composition
of check assemblies and all other pertinent information.
Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be drilled to appropriate

size either through individual pieces, or any combination of pieces held tightly
together.
All holes punched full size, subpunched or subdrilled shall be so
accurately punched that after assembling (before any reaming is done), a
cylindrical pin 3.2
smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole may be
entered perpendicular to the face of the member, without drifting, in at least
75 percent of the contiguous holes in the same plane. If the requirement is
not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be rejected. If any hole will not
pass a pin 4.8 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched
holes, this will cause for rejection.
When holes are reamed or drilled, 85 percent of the holes in any

continuous group shall, after reaming or drilling, show no offset greater than
0.8 mm between adjacent thickness of metal.
All steel templates shall have hardened steel bushings in holes

accurately dimensioned from the center lines if the connections as inscribed
on the template. The center lines shall be used in locating accurately the
template from the milled or scribed ends of the members.
403.3.7 Shop Assembly
1. Fitting for Riveting and Bolting

Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before
assembling. The parts of a member shall be assembled, well
pinned and firmly drawn together with bolts before reaming or
riveting is commenced. Assembled pieces shall be taken apart,
if necessary, for the removal of burrs and shavings produced by
the reaming operation. The member shall be free from twists,
bends and other deformation. Preparatory to the shop riveting of
full-sized punched material, the rivet holes, if necessary, shall be
spear-reamed for the admission of the rivets. The reamed holes
shall not be more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter
of the rivets.
End connection angles, and similar parts shall be carefully

adjusted to correct positions and bolted, clamped, or otherwise
firmly in place until riveted.
Parts not completely riveted in the shop shall be secured by
bolts, in so far as practicable, to prevent damage in shipment
and handling.
2. Shop Assembling
The field connections of main members of trusses, arches,

continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate girders
and rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled ends
of compression members in full bearing, and then shall have
their sub-size holes reamed to specified size while the
connections are assembled. Assembly shall be “Full Truss or
Girders Assembly” unless “Progressive Chord Assembly” or
“Special Complete Structure Assembly” is specified in the
Special Provisions or on the Plans.
Check assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Fields

Connections shall be in accordance with the provision of 2 (f) of
this Subsection.
Each assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of

holes and fit of milled joints, shall be approved by the Engineer
before reaming is commenced or before an N/C drilled check
assembly is dismantled.
The fabricator shall furnished the Engineer a camber diagram

showing the camber at each panel point in the cases of trusses
or arch ribs and at the location of field splices and fractions of
span length (0.25 points minimum, 0.10 points maximum) in
case of continuous beam and girders or rigid frames. When the
shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special
Complete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall show
the camber measured in assembly. When any of the other
methods of shop assembly is used, the camber diagram shall
show calculated camber.
Methods of assembly shall be described below:

Full of Truss or Girders Assembly shall consist of
assembling all members of each truss, arch rib, bent,
tower face, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid
frame at one time.
Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shall consist of

assembling initially for each truss, arch rib, bent, tower
face, continuous beam line, plate girder, or rigid frame all
members in at least three continuous shop sections or
panels but not less than the number of panels associated
with three continuous chord lengths (i.e., length between
field splices) and not less than 45.72 m in case of
structures longer than 45.72 m. At least one shop section
or panel or as many panels as are associated with a
chord length shall be added at the advancing end of the
assembly before any member is removed from the
rearward end so that the assembled portion of the
structure is never less than that specified above.
Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling with

geometric angles at the joints, the full length of each
chord or each truss or open spandrel arch, or each leg of
each bent or tower, than reaming their field connection
holes while the members are assembled; and reaming the
web member connections to steel templates set at
geometric (not
cambered) angular relation to the chord lines. Field
connection holes in web members shall be reamed to
steel templates. At least one end of each web member
shall be milled or shall be scribed normal to the
longitudinal axis of the member and the templates of both
ends of the member shall be accurately located from one
of the milled ends or scribed line.
Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling

contiguous chord members in the manner specified for
Full Chord Assembly, and in the number and length
specified for Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly.
Special Complete Structure Assembly shall consist of

assembling the entire structure, including the floor
system. (This procedure is ordinarily needed only for
complicated structures such as those having curbed
girders, or extreme skew in combination with severe
grade or camber). The assembly including camber,
alignment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints shall
be approved by the Engineer before reaming is
commenced.
A Contractor shall furnished the Engineer a camber
diagram showing the camber at each panel point of each
truss, arch rib, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid
frame. When shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder

Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the
camber diagram shall show the camber measured in
assembly. When any of the other methods of shop
assembly is used, the camber diagram shall show
calculated camber.
Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Field

Connections. A check assembly shall be required for each
major structural type of each project, unless otherwise
designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, and
shall consist of at least three contiguous shop sections or,
in a truss, all members in at least three contiguous panels
but not less than the number of panels associated with
three contiguous chord lengths (i.e., length between field
splices). Check assemblies should be based on the
proposed order erection, joints in bearings, special
complex points, and similar considerations. Such special
points could be the portals of skewed trusses, etc.
Use of either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero

secondary stresses under deadload conditions after erection) or
cambered angles (giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under
no-load conditions) should be designated on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions.
The check assemblies shall be preferably be the first such

sections of each major structural type to be fabricated.
No matchmaking and no shop assemblies other than the check

assemblies shall be required.
If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to

demonstrate that the required accuracy is being obtained, further
check assemblies may be required by the Engineer for which there
shall be no additional cost to the contracting authority.
403.3.8 Rivets and Riveting

The size of rivets called for on the Plans shall be the size before
heating. Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified,
and of uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly
made, concentric with the rivets holes, and in full contact with the surface of
the member. Sufficient rivets for field connections shall be furnished to rivet
the entire structure with an ample surplus to replace all rivets burned, lost or
cut out.
Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red color” and shall be driven
while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall not be
driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, scale
and other adhering matter. Any rivet which is sealed excessively, will be
rejected.
All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise defective
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head
is defective in size or whose head is driven off center will be considered
defective and shall be removed. Stitch rivets that are loosened by driving of
adjacent rivets shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets.
Caulking, recapping, or double gunning of rivets heads will not be permitted.
Shop rivets shall be driven by direct- acting rivet machines when

practicable. Approved bevelled rivet sets shall be used for forming rivet heads
on sloping surfaces. When the use of a direct- acting rivet machine is not
practicable, pneumatic hammers of approved size shall be used. Pneumatic
bucking tools will be required when the size and length of the rivets warrant
their use.
Rivets may be driven cold provided their diameter is not over 9.5 mm.
403.3.9 Bolted Connections, Unfurnished, Turned and Ribbed Bolts
1. General
Bolts under this Subsection shall conform to “Specifications for

Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard
Fasteners”, ASTM A 307. Specifications for high strength bolts
are covered under Subsection 403.3.10.
Bolts shall be unfinished, turned or an approved form of ribbed

bolts with hexagonal nuts and heads except that ribbed bolts
shall have button heads. Bolted connections shall be used only
as indicated by the Plans or Special Provisions. Bolts not
tightened to the proof loads shall have single self locking nuts or
double nuts. Bevel washers shall be used where bearing faces
have a slope or more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to
the bolt axis. Bolts shall be of such length that will extend entirely
through their nuts but not more than 6.3 mm beyond them.
Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damage

to the threads. A snap shall be used to prevent damage to the
heads. The heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work
with the full effort of a man using a suitable wrench, not less than
381 mm long for bolts of nominal diameter 19 mm and over.
Heads of bolts shall be tapped with a hammer while the nuts are
being tightened.
2. Unfinished Bolts
Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types are

specified. The number of bolts furnished shall be 5 percent more
than the actual number shown on the Plans for each size and
length.
3. Turned Bolts
The surface of the body of turned bolts shall meet the ANSI
roughness rating value of 125. Heads and nuts shall be
hexagonal with standard dimensions for bolts of the nominal size
specified or the next larger nominal size. Diameter of threads
shall be equal to the body of the bolt or the nominal diameter of
the bolt specified. Holes for turned bolts shall be carefully reamed
with bolts furnished to provide for a light driving fit. Threads shall
be entirely outside of the holes. A washer shall be provided under
the nut.
4. Ribbed Bolts
The body of ribbed shall be of an approved form with
continuous longitudinal ribs. The diameter of the body measured
on a circle through the points of the ribs shall be 1.98 mm greater
than the nominal diameter specified for the bolts.
Ribbed bolts shall be furnished with round heads conforming

to ANSI B 18.5 unless otherwise specified. Nuts shall be
hexagonal, either recessed or with a washer of suitable
thickness. Ribbed bolts shall make a driving fit with the holes.
The hardness of the ribs shall be such that the ribs do not mash
down enough to permit the bolts to turn in the holes during
tightening. If for any reason the bolt twists before drawing tight,
the holes shall be carefully reamed and an oversized bolt used as
a replacement. The Contractor shall provide and supply himself
with oversize bolts and nuts for this replacement in an amount not
less than ten percent (10%) of the number of ribbed bolts
specified.
403.3.10 Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts)
1. Bolts
Bolts shall be AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325 or AASHTO M

tensioned to a high tension. Other fasteners which meet the chemical requirements
of AASHTO M 164 or M 253 and which meet the mechanical requirements of the
same specification in full size tests and which have body diameter and bearing areas
under the head and nut, or their equivalents, not less than those provided by a bolt
and nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed above, may be used subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
Bolts lengths shall be determined by adding the grip-length values given in Table
403.1 to the total thickness of connected material. The values of Table 403.1
compensate for manufacturer’s tolerance, the use of heavy semi-finished hexagon
nut and a positive “stick-through” at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat
washer that is used and 4 mm to the tabular value and for each bevelled washer add
7.9 mm. The length determined shall be adjusted to the next longer 6.3 mm.
Table 403.1 – Grip-Length Values

Bolts Size (mm) To determine required
bolt length, add grip
(mm) *
9.5 17.5
12.7 22.2
19.0 25.4
22.2 28.6
25.4 31.7
28.6 38.1
31.7 41.3
34.9 44.4
38.1 47.6
Does not include allowance for washer thickness
Bolted Parts
The slope of surface of bolted parts in contact with the bolt

head and nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane
normal to the bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when
assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other
interposed
compressible material. When assembled, all joint surfaces,

including those adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or washers, shall
be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of
burrs, dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid
seating of the
parts. Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing-type

connections.
In friction -type connections, the Class, as defined below,

indicating the condition of the contact surfaces shall be specified
on the Plans. Where no Class is specified, all joint surfaces shall
be free of scale, except tight mill scale and shall not have a vinyl
wash.
Classes A, B and C (uncoated). Contact surfaces shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or
other coatings.
Class D (hot-dip galvanized and roughened). Contact surfaces

shall be tightly scored by wire brushing or blasting after shall
be a light application of manual or power brushing that marks
or scores the surface but remove relatively little of the zinc
coating. The blasting treatment shall be a light “brush-off”
treatment which will produce a dull gray appearance.
However, neither treatment should be severed enough to
produce any break or discontinuity in the zinc surface.
Classes E and F (blast-cleaned, zinc rich paint). Contact

surfaces shall be coated with organic or inorganic zinc rich
paint as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council
Specification SSPC 12.00.
Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallized zinc or aluminum).

Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with AWS
C2.2, Recommended Practice for Metallizing with Aluminum
and Zinc for Protection of Iron and Steel, except that
subsequent sealing treatments, described in Section IV
therein shall not be used.
Class I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be coated in

accordance with the provisions of the Steel Structure Painting
Council Pretreatment Specifications SSPC PT3.
AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and AASHTO M

253 bolts shall not be galvanized nor shall they be used to
connect galvanized material.
3. Installation
Bolt Tension. Each fastener shall be tightened to provide,

when all fasteners in the joints are tight at least the minimum
bolt tension shown in Table 403.2 for the size of fastener
used.
Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated

wrenches or by the turn-of -nut method. If required, because
of bolt entering and wrench operation clearances, tightening
by either procedure may be done by turning the bolt while the
nut is prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used, shall
be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to
perform the required tightening of each bolt in approximately
ten seconds. AASHTO M 253 and galvanized AASHTO M 164
(ASTM A bolts shall not be reused. Other AASHTO M 164
(ASTM A bolts may be reused, but not more than once, if
approved by the Engineer. Retightening previously tightened
bolts which may have been loosened by the tightening of
adjacent bolts shall not be considered as a reuse.
Washers. All fasteners shall have a hardened washer under

the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening except that
AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts installed by the turn of
the nut method in holes which are not oversized or slotted
may have the washer omitted. Hardened washers shall be
used under both the head and nut regardless of the element
turned in the case of AASHTO M 253 bolts if the material
against which it bears has a specified yield strength less than
275.76 MPa
Table 403.2 – Bolt Tension
Minimum Bolt Tension1, kg.
AASHTO M AASHTO M
Bolt Size, 164 253
mm (ASTM A (ASTM A
325) 420)
Bolts Bolts
12.7 5 466 6 758
15.9 8 709 10 569
19.0 12 882 15 821
22.2 13 268 21 999
25.4 23 360 24 312
28.6 25 605 36 786
31.7 32 522 45 858
34.9 38 760 55 111
38.1 47 174 66 905
Equals to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile
strength bolts. Where an outer face of the bolted parts
has a slope of more than 1:20 with respect to a Plane
normal to the bolt axis, a smooth bevelled washer shall
be used to compensate for the lack of parallel line.
Calibrated Wrench Tightening. When Calibrated wrenches are

used to provide the bolt tension as specified above, their
setting shall be such as to induce a bolt tension 5 to 10
percent in excess of this value. These wrenches shall be
calibrated at least once each working day by tightening, in a
device capable of indicating actual bolt tension, not less than
three typical bolts of each diameter from the bolts to be
installed. Power wrenches shall be adjusted to installed or cut-
out at the selected tension. If manual torque wrenches are
used, the torque indication corresponding to the calibrating
tension shall be noted and used in the installation of all the
tested lot. Nuts shall be turned in the tightening direction when
torque is measured. When using calibrated wrenches to install
several bolts in a single joint, the wrench shall be returned to
“touch-up” bolts previously tightened which may have been
loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts, until all are
tightened to the prescribed amount.
Turn-of-Nut Tightening. When the turn-of-nut method is used to provide the bolt
tension specified in (a) above, there shall first be enough bolts brought to a “snug
tight” condition to insure that the parts of the joint are brought into full contact with
each other.
Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench
or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. Following this initial
operation, bolts shall be placed in any remaining holes in the connection and brought
to snug tightness.
All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened additionally, by the applicable amount of
nut rotation specified in Table 403.3 with tightening progressing systematically from
the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. During this operation, there shall be
no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.
Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners. The installation of lock pin and collar fasteners shall
be by methods approved by the Engineer.
Table 403.3 – Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition 1
Disposition of Outer Faces of

Bolt Length Bolted Parts
Both faces One face Both faces
norma
measured from normal to l to bolt sloped not
underside of faces normal to axis and other more than 1:20
hea
d to bolt axis face sloped from normal to
extreme end of not more 1:20 bolt axis (bevel
poin
t (bevel washer washers not
not used) used)
Up to and
including 4 0.33 turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn
diameters
Ove
r 4
diameters but 0.5 turn 0.66 turn 0.625 turn
not exceeding
8
diameters
Ove
r 8
diameters but 0.66 turn 0.83 turn 1 turn
not exceeding
12 diameters2
Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut

or bolt) being turned. For bolts installed by ½ turn and less
the tolerance should be plus or minus 300, for bolts installed
by 2/3 turn and more, the tolerance should be plus or minus
450.
No research work has been performed by the Research

Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural joints to establish
the turn-of-nut procedure when bolt lengths exceed 12
diameters. Therefore, the required rotation must be
determined by actual tests in a suitable tension device
simulating the actual conditions.
4. Inspection
The Engineer will determine that the requirements of these
Specifications are not in the work. When the calibrated wrench
method of tightening is used, the Engineer shall have full
opportunity to witness the calibration tests.
The Engineer will observe the installation and tightening of the

bolts to determine that the selected tightening procedure is
properly used and will determine that all bolts are tightened.
The following inspection shall be used unless a more

extensive or different procedure is specified:
The Contractor shall use an inspecting wrench which may

either be a torque wrench or a power wrench that can be
accurately adjusted in accordance with the requirements of
Subsection 403.3.10(3) (c) above, in the presence of the
Engineer.
Three bolts of the same grade, size and condition as those

under inspection shall be placed individually in a calibration
device capable of indicating bolt tension. Length may be any
length representative of bolts used in the structure. There
shall be a washer under the part turned in tightening each
bolt.
When the inspecting wrench is a torque wrench, each of the

three bolts specified above shall be tightened in the calibration
device by any convenient means to the minimum tension
specified for its size in Table 403.2. The inspecting wrench
shall then be applied to the tightened bolt and the torque
necessary to run the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately
25.4 mm at 304.8
radius) in the tightening direction shall be determined. The
average torque measured in the tests of three bolts shall be
taken as the job inspection torque to be used in the manner
specified below.
When the inspecting wrench is a power wrench, it shall be

adjusted so that it will tighten each of the three bolts specified
to
tension at least 5 but not more than 10 percent greater than
the minimum tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. This
setting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting torque to
be used in the manner specified below.
Bolts, represented by the three samples bolts prescribed

above, which have been tightening in the structure shall be
inspected by applying, in the tightening direction, the
inspecting wrench and its job inspecting torque to 10 percent
of the bolts, but not less than two bolts selected at random in
each connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this
application of the job inspecting torque, the connection shall
be accepted as properly tightened.
If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the job

inspecting torque, this torque shall be applied to all bolts in the
connection, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned by the
job inspecting torque shall be tightened and re-inspected, or
alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option may re-
tighten all the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the
connection for the specified inspection.
403.3.11 Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with the best modern practice and
the applicable requirements at AWS D1.1 except as modified by AASHTO
“Standard Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges”.
403.3.12 Erection
1. General
The Contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery and
appliances, including driftpins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the
expeditious handling of the work and shall erect the metal work, remove the
temporary construction, and do all work necessary to complete the structure
as required by the Contract and in accordance with the Plans and these
Specifications.
If shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall

dismantle the old structure on the bridge site in accordance with Item 101,
Removal of Structures and Obstructions.
403.3.13 Handling and Storing Materials
Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It

shall be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed
upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be
supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent injury from
deflection. If the Contract is for erection only, the Contractor shall check the
material turned over to him against the shipping lists and report promptly in
writing any shortage or damage discovered. He shall be responsible for the
loss of any material while in his care, or for any damage caused to it after
being received by him.
403.3.14 Falsework
The false work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed

and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer working drawings for falsework and
working drawings for changes in any existing structure for maintaining traffic,
in accordance with Clause 45 of Part G, Div. II, Vol. I.
403.3.15 Method and Equipment
Before starting the work of erection, the Contractor shall inform the
Engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to follow, and the
amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall not
be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of
his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full accordance with
the Plans and Specifications. No work shall be done until such approval by the
Engineer has been obtained.
403.3.16 Straightening Bent Materials
The strengthening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up

members, when permitted by the Engineer, shall be done by methods that will
not produce fracture or other injury. Distorted members shall be straightened
by mechanical means or, if approved by the Engineer, by the carefully planned
and supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat, except that
heat straightening of AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steel
members shall be done only under rigidly controlled procedures, each
application subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no case shall the
maximum temperature of the AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517
steels exceed 607.2 0C, nor shall the temperature exceed 510 0C at the weld
metal or within 152.4 mm of weld metal. Heat shall not be applied directly on
weld metal. In all other steels, the temperature of the heated area shall not
exceed 648.90C (a dull red) as controlled by temperature indicating crayons,
liquids or bimetal thermometers.
Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of stress and

from external forces, except stresses resulting from mechanical means used
in conjunction with the application of heat.
Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the

metal shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture.
403.3.17 Assembling Steel
The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the working drawings

and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully handled
so that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. Hammering which
will injure or distort the members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and
surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are
assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever methods, truss spans shall be
erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The
blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are fully
connected with permanent fasteners and all other truss connections pinned
and erection bolted. Splices of butt joints of compression members, that are
milled to bear and of railing shall not be permanently fastened until the spans
have been swung, except that such permanent fastening may be
accomplished for the truss members at any time that joint holes are fair.
Splices and field connections shall have one-half of the holes filled with
erection bolts and cylindrical erection pins (half bolts and half pins) before
placing permanent fasteners. Splices and connections carrying traffic during
erection shall have three-fourths of the holes so filled, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the permanent

fasteners and cylindrical erection pins will be 1.6 mm larger.
403.3.18 Riveting
Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting except when the use
of hand tools is permitted by the Engineer. Rivets larger than 15.9 mm in
diameter shall not be driven by hand. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head
closely to insure good bearing, shall be used. Connections shall be accurately
and securely fitted up before the rivets are driven.
Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not
sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be
reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red” color
and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet
heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have
full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop
rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely
together. Caulking or recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the
surrounding metal shall not be injured. If necessary, they shall be drilled out.
403.3.19 Pin Connections
Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be
furnished by the Contractor without charge. Pins shall be so driven that the
members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and
the threads burred at the face of the nut with a pointed tool.
403.3.20 Setting Shoes and Bearings

Shoes and bearing shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas
that are improperly finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be set level in
exact position and shall have full and even bearing. The shoes and bearing
plates may be set by either of the following methods:
1. Method 1
The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated with red
lead paint and then covered with three layers of 405 to 472 g/m 2
duck, each layer being coated thoroughly on its top surface with
red lead paint. The shoes and bearing plates shall be placed in
position while the paint is plastic.
As alternatives to canvas and red lead, and when so noted on
the Plans or upon written permission by the Engineer, the
following may be used:
Sheet lead of the designated thickness
Preformed fabric pad composed of multiple layers of 270 g/m 2

duck impregnated and bound with high quality natural rubber
or of equivalent and equally suitable materials compressed
into resilient pads of uniform thickness. The number of plies
shall be such as to produce the specified thickness, after
compression and vulcanizing. The finished pads shall
withstand compression loads perpendicular to the plane of the
laminations of not less than 7 kg/mm 2 without detrimental
reduction in thickness or extension.
Elastomeric bearing pads
Method 2
The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and

fixed with grout. No load shall be placed on them until the grout
has set for at least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to
keep the grout well moistened during this period. The grout shall
consist of one part Portland Cement to one part of fine-grained
sand.
The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes

in expansion shoes shall correspond with the temperature at the
time of erection. The nuts on anchor bolts at the expansion ends
shall be adjusted to permit the free movement of the span.
403.3.21 Preparing Metal Surfaces for Painting
All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall be blast
cleaned unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved in
writing by the Engineer.
In repainting existing structures where partial cleaning is required, the

method of cleaning will be specified in the Special Provision.
The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in the

“Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications” (SSPC) meeting one of the
following classes of surface preparation.
a. SSPC – SP – 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

b. SSPC – SP – 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
c. SSPC – SP – 8 Pickling
d. SSPC – SP – 10 Near White Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a dense and uniform anchor
pattern of not less than one and one-half mills as measured with an approved
surface profile comparator.
Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day blast
cleaning is done. If cleaned surface rust or are contaminated with foreign
material before painting is accomplished, they shall be recleaned by the
Contractor at his expense.
When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surfaces shall be
blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC – SP – 10. When paint systems No. 2,
4 or 5 are specified, the steel surface shall be blast cleaned in accordance
with SSPC – SP – 6.
403.3.22 System of Paint

The paint system to be applied shall consist of one as set forth in Table
403.4 and as modified in the Special Provisions.
403.3.23 Painting Metal Surfaces
1. Time of Application
The prime coat of paint or pretreatment when specified, shall

be applied as soon as possible after the surface has been
cleaned and before deterioration of the surface occurs. Any oil,
grease, soil, dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after
the surface preparation is completed shall be removed prior to
painting. In the event the rusting occurs after completion of the
surface preparation, the surfaces shall be again cleaned.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of

cleaned surfaces with salts, acids, alkali, or other corrosive
chemicals before the prime coat is applied and between
applications of the remaining coats of paint. Such contaminants
shall be removed from the surface. Under these circumstances,
the pretreatments or, in the absence of a pretreatment, the prime
coat of paint shall be applied immediately after the surface has
been cleaned.
2. Storage of Paint and Thinner
All paint and thinner should preferably be stored in a separate

building or room that is well ventilated and free from excessive
heat, sparks, flame or the direct ray of the sun.
All containers of paint should remain unopened until required

for use. Containers which have been opened shall be used first.
Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated

during storage shall not be used. Thixotropic materials which may
be stirred to attain normal consistency are satisfactory.
3. Mixing and Thinning

All ingredients in any container of paint shall be thoroughly
mixed before use and shall be agitated often enough during
application to keep the pigment in suspension.
Paint mixed in the original container shall not be transferred

until all settled pigment is incorporated into the vehicle. This does
not imply that part of the vehicle cannot be poured off temporarily
to simplify the mixing.
Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, except that hard

mixing will be permitted for container up to 19 litres in size.
Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated

area away from sparks or flames.
Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by means of an

air stream bubbling under the paint surface.
When a skin has formed in the container, the skin shall be cut
loose from the sides of the container, removed, and discarded. If
such skins are thick enough to have a practical effect on the
composition and quality of the paint, the paint shall not be used.
The paint shall be mixed in manner which will insure breaking

up of all lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and a
uniform composition. If mixing is done by hand, most of the
vehicle shall be poured off into a clean container. The pigment in
the paint shall be lifted from the bottom of the container with a
broad, flat paddle, lumps shall be broken up, and the pigment
thoroughly mixed with the vehicle. The poured off vehicle shall be
returned to the paint with simultaneous stirring, or pouring
repeatedly from one container to another until the composition is
uniform. The bottom of the container shall be inspected for
unmixed pigment. Tinting pastes or colors shall be wetted with a
small amount of thinner, vehicle, or paint and thoroughly mixed.
The thinned mixture shall be added to the large container of paint
and mixed until the color is uniform.
Paint which does not have a limited pot life, or does not
deteriorate on standing, may be mixed at any time before using, but if settling
has occurred, it must be remixed immediately before using. Paint shall not
remain in spray pots, painter’s buckets, etc., overnight, but shall be gathered
into a container and remixed before use.
No thinner shall be added to the paint unless necessary for proper
application. In no case shall more than 0.5 litres of thinner be added per 3.8
litres unless the paint is intentionally formulated for greater thinning.
The type of thinner shall comply with the paint specification.
When the use of thinner is permissible, thinner shall be added to paint

during the mixing process. Painters shall not add thinner to paint after it has
been thinned to the correct consistency.
All thinning shall be done under supervision of one acquainted with the
correct amount and type of thinner to be added to the paint.
Table 403.4 – Paint System

Paint System
1 2 3 4 5
High Pollution or Coastal x x x
Mild Climate x X
Note:
Paint system shown for severe areas are satisfactorily in less
severe areas.
Coastal - within 304.8 m of ocean or tidal water.
High pollution-air pollution environment such as industrial areas.
Mild-other than coastal areas not in air pollution environment.
All structural steel shall be painted by one of the following

systems. The required system or choice of systems will be shown
in the Contract.
System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to repaint

existing structures where the other systems are not compatible.
Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film
System 1 – Vinyl Paint System
Wash Prime 708.03 (b) 12.7

Intermediate Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
3rd Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
4th Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
Finish Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
Total thickness 165.10 – 203.20
System 2 – Epoxy-Polymide System

Prime Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20
Intermediate Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20
3rd Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20
Finish Coat 708.03 (c) 38.10 – 50.80
* The third coat may be eliminated in mild climates
Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film

System – Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating
3 System
Prime Coat 708.03(d) 88.90 – 127
708.0
Epoxy Intermediate Coat 3 (d) 40.80 – 76.20
708.0
Finish Coat 3 (d) 38.10 – 50.80
Total thickness 177.80 – 254
Alternate System
708.0
Prime Coat 3 (d) 88.90 – 127
708.0
Wash Primer Tie Coat 3 (d) 12.70
708.0
Finish Coat 3 (d) 38.10 – 50.80

System 4 – Alkyd-Oil-Basic Lead-Chromate System
708.0
Prime Coat 3 (e) 38.10 – 50.80
708.0
Intermediate Coat 3 (e) 38.10 – 50.80
708.0
Finish Coat 3 (e) 38.10 – 50.80

* The paint system may be specified as four coats for new
structure steel in mild climate, with a minimum thickness of
152.40 mm.
System 5 – Organic Zinc-Rich Paint System
708.0
Prime Coat 3 (f) 38.10 – 50.80
708.0
Intermediate Coat 3 (f) 50.80 – 63.50
708.0
Wash Primer Tie Coat 3 (f) 12.70
Finish Coat 708.0 (f) 38.10 – 50.80
3
4. Application of Paint
a. General
The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. Paint shall
be applied by brushing or spraying or a combination of these
methods. Daubers or sheepskins may be used when no other
method is practicable for proper application in places of difficult
access. Dipping, roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only
when specifically authorized. All paints shall be applied in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Open seams at contact surfaces of built up members which

would retain moisture shall be caulked with red lead paste, or
other approved material, before the second undercoat of paint is
applied.
Paint shall not be applied when the surrounding air temperature

is below 4.4 0C. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature
is expected to drop to 0 0C before the paint has dried. Paint shall
not be applied to steel at a temperature over 51.7 0C unless the
paint is specifically formulated for application at the proposed
temperature, nor shall paint be applied to steel which is at a
temperature that will cause blistering or porosity or otherwise will
be detrimental to the life of the paint.
Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, or when it is raining or

when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Paint shall not be
applied to wet or damp surfaces.
When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, the steel

shall be painted under cover, or protected, or sheltered or the
surrounding air and the steel heated to a satisfactory
temperature. In such cases, the above temperature and humidity
conditions shall be met. Such steel shall remain under cover or
be protected until dry or until weather conditions permit its
exposure.
Any applied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain or
condensation shall first be permitted to dry. Then damaged areas
of paint shall be removed, the surface again prepared and then
repainted with the same number of coats of paint of the same
kind as the undamaged areas.
If stripe painting is stipulated in the Special Provisions or if the

Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all edges, corners,
crevices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp edges shall be painted with
the priming paint by brush before the steel receives first full prime
coat of paint. Such striping shall extend for at least 25.4 mm from
the edge. When practicable, this stripe coat shall be permitted to
dry before the prime coat is applied, otherwise the stripe coat
shall set to touch before the full prime coat is applied. However,
the stripe coat shall not be permitted to dry for a period of long
enough to allow rusting of the unprimed steel. When desired, the
stripe coat may be applied after a complete prime coat.
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint shall be

applied as continuous film of uniform thickness free of pores. Any
thin spots or areas missed in the application shall be repainted
and permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is applied. Film
thickness is included in the description of paint systems. Each
coat of paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness before
application of the succeeding coat.
Brush Application
Paint shall be worked into all crevices and corners where

possible and surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted
by spray, doubers, or sheepskins. All runs or rags shall be
brushed out. There shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the
paint.
Spray Application of Paint
The equipment used for spray application of paint shall be

suitable for the intended purpose, shall be capable of properly
atomizing the paint to be applied and shall be equipped with
suitable pressure regulators and gages. The air caps, nozzles,
and needles shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of
the equipment for the material being sprayed. The equipment
shall be kept in satisfactory condition to permit proper paint
application. In closed or recirculating paint spray system, where
gas under pressure is used over the liquid, the gas shall be an
inert, one such as nitrogen. Traps or separators shall be provided
to remove oil and water from the compressed air. These traps or
separators shall be adequate size and shall be drained
periodically during operations. The air from the spray gun
impinging against the surface shall show no water or oil.
Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray

pots or containers during paint applications either by continuous
mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as
necessary.
The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the
guns shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The
pressure on the material in the pot shall be adjusted when
necessary for changes in elevation of the gun above the pot. The
atomizing air pressure at the gun shall be high enough to atomize
the paint properly but not so high as to cause excessive fogging
of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent or loss by overspray.
Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt,

dried paint and other foreign material are not deposited in the
paint film. Any solvents left in the equipment shall be completely
removed before applying paint to the surface being painted.
Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with overlapping at the

edge of the spray pattern. The spray shall be adjusted so that the
paint is deposited uniformly. During application, the gun shall be
held perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which will
insure that a wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The
trigger of the gun should be released at the end of each stroke.
All rums and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the

paint shall be removed and the surface repainted. Spray
application of prime coats shall in all cases be immediately
followed by brushing
Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted by brush,

if not accessible by brush, daubers or sheepskins shall be used.
Brushes shall be used to work paint into cracks, crevices and
blind spots where are not adequately painted by spray.
Shop Painting
Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and before any

damage to the surface occurs from weather or other exposure.
Shop contact surfaces shall not be painted unless specified.
Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be inaccessible

after assembly shall receive the full paint system specified or
three shop coats of the specified before assembly.
The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall

not be painted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the areas
of steel surfaces to be in contact with wood shall receive either
the full paint coats specified or three shop coats of the specified
primer.
If paint would be harmful to a welding operator or would be

detrimental to the welding operation or the finished welds, the
steel shall not be painted within a suitable distance from the
edges to be welded. Welding through inorganic zinc paint
systems will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Antiweld spatter coatings shall be removed before painting.

Weld slag and flux shall be removed by methods at least as
effective as those specified for the cleaning.
Machine-finished or similar surfaces that are not to be painted,

but do not require protections, shall be protected with a coating of
rust inhibitive petroleum, other coating which may be more
suitable, for special conditions.
Erection marks and weight marks shall be copied on area that

have been previously painted with the shop coat.
Field Painting
Steel structures shall be painted as soon as practicable after

erection.
Metal which has been shop coated shall be touched up with
the same type of paints as the shop coat. This touch-up shall
include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets
and all damaged or defective paint and rusted areas. The
Contractor may, at his option, apply an overall coat of primer in
place of touch-up spot painting.
Surfaces (other than contact surfaces) which are accessible

before erection but which will not be accessible after erection
shall receive all field coats of paint before erection.
If possible the final coat of paint shall not be applied until all
concrete work is finished. If concreting or other operations
damage any paint, the surfaces shall be cleaned and repainted.
All cement or concrete spatter and dripping shall be removed
before any paint is applied.
Wet paint shall be protected against damage from dust or

other detrimental foreign matter to the extent practicable.
Drying of Painted Metal
The maximum practicable time shall be allowed for paint to dry

before recoating or exposure. No drier shall be added to paint on
the job unless specifically called for in the Specifications for the
paint. No painted metal shall be subjected to immersion before
the
paint is dried through. Paint shall be protected from rain,

condensation, contamination, and freezing until dry, to the fullest
extent practicable.
Handling of Painted Steel
Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has dried,
except for necessary handling in turning for painting or stacking
for drying.
Paint which is damaged in handling shall be scraped off and

touched-up with the same number of the coats and kinds of paint
as were previously applied to the steel.
Painted steel shall not be loaded for shipment or shipped until
it is dry.
Precautions shall be taken to minimize damage to paint films

resulting from stocking members.
Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of
Paints a. Instrumentation
Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-Off

(Type 1) or Fixed Probe (Type 2) Magnetic Gages. Type 1 gages
include Tinsley, Elcometer, Microtest and Inspector models. Type
2 gage include Elcometric, Minitector, General Electric, Verimeter
and Accuderm models.
Calibration
Type 1 (Pull-Off) Magnetic Gages
Measure the coating thickness on a series of reliable

standards covering the expected range of paint thickness.
Record the calibration correction either plus (+) or minus
(-)required at each standard thickness. To guard against
gage drift during use, re-check occasionally with one or more
of the standards.
When the gage adjustment has drifted so far that large

corrections are needed, it is advisable to re-adjust closer to
the standard values and re-calibrate.
For Type 1 gages, the preferred basic standards are

small, chromeplated steel panels that may be available from
the National Bureau of Standards in coating thickness from
12.70 mm to 203.20 mm.
Plastic shims of certified thickness in the appropriate

ranges may also be used to calibrate the gages. The gage is
held firmly enough to press the shim tightly against the steel
surface. Record the calibration correction as above.
2. Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gages
Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid on the

appropriate steel base (at least 76.2 x 76.2 x 3.2 mm) are
suitable working standards. These gages are held firmly
enough to press the shim tightly against the steel surface.
One should avoid excessive pressure that might indent the
plastic or, on a blast cleaned surface, might impress the
steel peaks into the undersurface of the plastic.
The National Bureau of Standards – standards panels

shall not be used to calibrate Type 2 gages.
Measurement Procedures
To determine the effect of the substrate surface condition on

the gage readings, access is required to some unpainted areas.
Repeated gage readings, even at points close together, may

differ considerably due to small surface irregularities. Three gage
readings should therefore be made for each spot measurement of
either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe a short distance
for each new gage reading. Discard any unusually high of flow
gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the
average of the three gage readings as the spot measurement.
1. Measurement with Type 1 (Pull-Off) Gage
Measure (A), the bare substrate, at a number of spots to

obtain a representative average value. Measure (B), the dry
paint film, at the specified number of spots.
contact of the probe with the paint and also to avoid adhesion of
the magnet. The accuracy of the measurement will be affected if
the coating is tacky or excessively soft.
The magnetic gages are sensitive to geometrical

discontinuities of the steel, as at holes, corners or edges. The
sensitivity to edge effects and discontinuities varies from gage to
gage. Measurements closer than 25.4 mm from the discontinuity
may not be valid unless the gage is calibrated specifically for that
location.
Magnetic gage readings also may be affected by proximity to

another mass of steel close to the body of the gage, by surface
curvature and presence of other magnetic fields.
All of the magnets or probe must be held perpendicular to the

painted surface to produce valid measurements.
403.3.24 Clean-up
Upon completion and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall

remove all falsework, falsework piling down to at least 609.6 mm below the
finished ground line, excavated or unused materials, rubbish and temporary
buildings. He shall replace or renew any fences damaged and restored in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which may have been
damaged during the prosecution of the work and shall leave the work site and
adjacent highway in a neat and presentable condition, satisfactory to the
Engineer. All excavated material or falsework placed in the stream channel
during construction shall be removed by the Contractor before final
acceptance.
403.4.1 Unit Basis
The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be the number of

kilos complete in place and accepted. For the purpose of measurement for
payment components fabricated from metals listed in (1) below, such as
casting, alloy steels, steel plates, anchor bolts and nuts, shoes, rockers,
rollers, pins and nuts, expansion dams, roadway drains and souppers, welds
metal, bolts embedded in concrete, cradles and brackets, posts, conduits and
ducts, and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection will be
considered as structural steel.
Unless otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be
computed and based upon the following mass:
1. Unit Density kg/m3

Aluminum, cast or rolled 2771.2
Bronze or copper alloy 8585.9
Copper sheet 8938.3
Iron, cast 7128.2
Iron, malleable 7528.7

Lead, sheet 11229
Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy

copper bearing and stainless 7849
Zinc 7208.3
2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring
The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the basis
of their nominal mass and dimensions as shown on the approved shop
drawings, deducting for copes, cuts and open holes, exclusive of rivets
holes. The mass of all plates shall be computed on the basis of nominal
dimensions with no additional for overrun.
The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless the

Bill of Quantities contains as pay item for bridge railing under Item 401,
Railings.
The mass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately.
3. Casting
The mass of casting shall be computed from the dimensions shown

on the approved drawings, deducting for open holes. To this mass will
be added 5 percent allowable for fillets and overruns. Scale mass may
be substituted for computed mass in the case of castings of small
complex parts for which accurate computations of mass would be
difficult.
4. Miscellaneous
The mass of erection bolts, shop and field paint, galvanizing the
boxes, crates and other containers used for shipping, together with sills,
struts, and rods used for supporting members during the transportation,
bridge hardware as defined in Subsection 402.2.2 excluding steel plates
and bearings, connectors used for joining timber members, nails, spikes
and bolts, except anchor bolts will be excluded.
5. Rivets Heads
The mass of all rivet heads, both files and shop, will be assumed as
follows:
Diameter of rivet kg per 100 heads

(mm)
12.7 1.80
15.9 3.20
19.0 5.44
22.2 8.16
25.4 11.80
28.6 16.33
31.7 21.8
6. High-Strength Bolts
High-strength steel bolts shall be considered for purpose of payment,

the same as rivets of the same diameter, with the mass of the bolt
heads and nuts the same as the corresponding rivet heads.
7. Welds
The mass of shop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows:
Size of Weld kg per linear metre

(mm)
6.3 0.984
7.9 1.213
9.5 1.771
12.7 2.690
5.9 3.936
19.0 5.379
22.2 7.314
25.4 9.774
The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the

theoretical volume from dimensions of the welds, with an addition of 50
mass percent as an allowance for overrun.
8. Other Items
The quantities of other Contract Items which enter into the completed
and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the manner
prescribed for the Items involved.
403.4.2 Lump Sum Basis
Lump sum will be the basis of payment unless noted otherwise in the
bidding documents. No measurements of quantities will be made except as
provided in Subsection 403.5.1 (4).

403.5.1 Structural Steel
1. Furnished, Fabricated and Erected
The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the

contract unit price per kilogram for “Structural Steel, furnished,
fabricated and erected”, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing,
magnetic particle inspection, delivering, erecting ready for use, and
painting all steel and other metal including all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided
in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.
2. Furnished and Fabricated
When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel, furnished and
fabricated” are shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity,
determined as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit
price per kilogram which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing,
magnet particle inspection, shop painting and delivering the
structural steel and other metal free of charges at the place
designated in the Special Provisions and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save erection
and except as provided in Subsection 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.
3. Erected
When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel Erected” are
shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided
above, will be paid for at the said contract unit price per kilogram
which price and payment shall be full compensation for unloading all
the structural steel and other metal, payment of any demurrage
charges, transporting to the bridge site, erecting, magnetic particle
inspection and radiographing, complete ready for use including
furnishing and applying the field paint including all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save
furnishing and fabrication, and except as provided in Subsections
403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.
4. Lump Sum
When the Bill of Quantities calls for lump sum price for “Structural
Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected”, the Item will be paid for at
the contract lump sum price and payment shall be full compensation
for furnishing, fabricating and erecting material and for all work
herein before prescribed in connection therewith, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work,
except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.
The estimate of the mass of structural steel shown on the Plans is

approximate only and no guarantee is made that it is the correct
mass to be furnished. No adjustment in the contract price will be
made if the mass furnished is more or less than estimated mass.
If changes in the work are ordered by the Engineer, which vary the
mass of steel to be furnished, the lump sum payment shall be
adjusted as follows:
a. The value per kilogram of the increase or decrease in

mass of structural steel involved in the change shall be
determined by dividing the contract lump sum amount by the
estimate of mass shown on the Plans. The adjusted contract
lump sum payment shall be the contract lump sum plus or minus
the value of the steel involved in the change, and no additional
compensation shall be made on account of said change.
b. Full-size members which are tested in accordance with the

Specifications when such tests are required by the Contract, shall
be paid for at the same rate as for comparable members in the
structure. Members which fail to meet the Contract requirements,
and members rejected as a result of test shall not be paid for.
403.5.2 Material Considered as Structural Steel
For the purpose of Subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise shown on

the Plans, castings, forgings, special alloy steels and steel plates, wrought
iron, and structural shapes of expansion joints and pier protection shall be
considered as structural steel except that when quantities and unit price for
certain alloy steels, forgings, castings or other specific categories of metal are
called for in the Bill of Quantities, the mass of such selected material,
determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the respective contract unit
price per kilogram for “Structural Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or
other category), furnished and fabricated, and erected” or “Structural Steel
(Subsection 403.4.1), furnished and fabricated” as named in the Bill of
Quantities.
403.5.3 Other Items
The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the completed
and accepted structure shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the
several Pay Items as prescribed for the Items involved.
403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing Steel
When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for structural
steel, the quantities of metal drains, scuppers, conduits, ducts and structural
shapes for expansion joints and pier protection, measured as provided above
will be paid for as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404.

403 (1) Structural Steel,
furnished, fabricated kilogram
and erected
and erected


403 (5) Structural Steel erected kilogram
403 (6) Structural Steel erected kilogram
and erected
Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for certain

particular components, other than under the general provision for structural
steel, designation of those particular cases shall be inserted in the spaces
provided in the pay names for Item 403 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6), as the case
may be.
ITEM 404 – REINFORCING STEEL
404.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and placing of

steel reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required in accordance
with this Specification and in conformity with the requirements shown on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710, Reinforcing

Steel and Wire Rope.
4.4.3 Construction Requirements
404.3.1 Order Lists

Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending diagrams shall
be furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the Engineer. The approval of
order lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any
expense incident to the revisions of materials furnished in accordance with
such lists and diagrams to make them comply with the Plans shall be borne by
the Contractor.
404.3.2 Protection of Material
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon
platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable
from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to
conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be
free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign
materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks
and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will
not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional
area and tensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen meets the
physical requirements for the size and grade of steel specified.
404.3.3 Bending
All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the shapes

shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer. Bars shall be bent around a
circular pin having the following diameters (D) in relation to the diameter of the
bar (d):
Nominal diameter, d, mm Pin diameter (D)

10 to 20 6d
25 to 28 8d
32 and greater 10d
Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter of the
principal bar enclosed therein.
404.3.4 Placing and Fastening

All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown
on the Plans or required by the Engineer and firmly held there during the
placing and setting of the concrete. Bars shall be tied at all intersections
except where spacing is less than 300mm in each directions, in which case,
alternate intersections shall be tied. Ties shall be fastened on the inside.
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks,

ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does not vary from the
position indicated on the Plans by more than 6mm. Blocks for holding
reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of
approved shapes and dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by
precast mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of
pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall
not be permitted. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or required by the
Engineer, the minimum distance between bars shall be 40mm. Reinforcement
in any member shall be placed and then inspected and approved by the
Engineer before the placing of concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of
this provision may be rejected and removal may be required. If fabric
reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall be straightened before being placed.
Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more than 1.8m intervals.
404.3.5 Splicing
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the

Plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Plans, will not be
permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall be
staggered as far as possible and with a minimum separation of not less than
40 bar diameters. Not more than one-third of the bars may be spliced in the
same cross-section, except where shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise
shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a minimum distance of:
Splice Type Grade 40 Grade 60 But not less

min. lap min. lap than
Tension 24 bar dia 36 bar dia 300 mm
Compression 20 bar dia 24 bar dia 300 mm
In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired

together. Lapped splices will not be permitted at locations where the concrete
section is insufficient to provide minimum clear distance of one and one-third
the maximum size of coarse aggregate between the splice and the nearest
adjacent bar. Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the
Plans or if authorized by the Engineer in writing. Spiral reinforcement shall be
spliced by lapping at least one and a half turns or by butt welding unless
otherwise shown on the Plans.
404.3.6 Lapping of Bar Mat
Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other

sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened at the
ends and edges. The overlap shall not be less than one mesh in width.
The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity
placed and accepted in the completed structure.
No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs and

other material used in fastening the reinforcing steel in place. If bars are
substituted upon the Contractor’s request and approved by the Engineer and
as a result thereof more steel is used than specified, only the mass specified
shall be measured for payment.
No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by the

Contractor unless directed or approved by the Engineer.
When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, costs
will be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of Quantities.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools

404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram
ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
405.1 Description
405.1.1 Scope
This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing

concrete in all structures except pavements in accordance with this
Specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on
the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine
aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixture when specified, and water mixed in
the proportions specified or approved by the Engineer.
405.1.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete
Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely: A, B, C, P

and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as called for on
the Plans.
The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows:
Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The

important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders, columns,
arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls, and reinforced
footings.
Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and

gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of reinforcement.
Class C – Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles and

cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors.
Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and members.
Seal – Concrete deposited in water.
405.2.1 Portland Cement
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1.
405.2.2 Fine Aggregate
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2.
405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate
It shall conform all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except that

gradation shall conform to Table 405.1.
Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate

Standar
d Alternate Class Class Class Class Class
US
Mm Standard A B C P Seal
63 2-1/2” 100
50 2” 100 95 – 100
37.5 1-1/2” 95 – 100 - 100
25 1” - 35 – 70 100 95 – 100
19.0 ¾” 35 – 70 - 100 95 – 100 -
12.5 ½” - 10 – 30 90 – 100 - 25 – 60
9.5 3/8” 10 – 30 - 40 – 70 20 – 55 -
4.75 No.4 0-5 0-5 0 – 15* 0 – 10* 0 – 10*
The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2
mass percent of the design cement content.
405.2.4 Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4
405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope.
405.2.6 Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.7
405.2.7 Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8.
405.2.8 Expansion Joint Materials
Expansion joint materials shall be:
Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to AASHTO M 153.
Hot-Poured Elastic Type, conforming to AASHTO M 173.
Preformed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.

405.2.9 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals
These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.
405.2.10 Elastomeric Bearing Pads
These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 412 – Elastomeric Bearing
Pads.
405.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregates
Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements

of Subsection 311.2.10.
405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3)

concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall be taken
from each seventy five (75) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction
thereof placed each day.
Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined in

accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO:
T
Sampling of fresh concrete 141
Weight per cubic metre and air content (gravi-
T
Metric) of concrete 121
Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates T 27
T
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete 119
Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate T 84
Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following:
Making and curing concrete compressive and

flexural tests specimens in the field T 23
Compressive strength of molded concrete
Cylinders T 22
405.4 Production Requirements
405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with the

requirements for each class of concrete as specified in Table 405.2, using the
absolute volume method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Standard 211.1. “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal
and Heavyweight Concrete”. Other methods of proportioning may be
employed in the mix design with prior approval of the Engineer. The mix shall
either be designed or approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of
materials during the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design.
The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as

specified in Table 405.2.
Table 405.2 - Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Structures
Minimum Maximum Consistency Designated Minimum

Compressiv
Class Cement Water/ Range in Size of Coarse e
Of Content Cement Slump Aggregate Strength of
Concre Per m3 Ratio 150x300mm
Square
te Opening Concrete
kg kg/kg mm (inch) Std. mm Cylinder
(bag**) Specimen at
28 days,
MN/m2 (psi)
A 360 0.53 50 – 100 37.5 – 4.75 20.7

(9 bags) (2 – 4) (1-1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
B 320 0.58 50 – 100 50 – 4.75 16.5
(8 bags) (2 – 4) (2” – No. 4) (2400)
C 380 0.55 50 – 100 12.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (2 – 4) (1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
P 440 0.49 100 max. 19.0 – 4.75 37.7
(11 bags) (4 max.) (3/4” – No. 4) (5000)
Seal 380 0.58 100 – 200 25 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (4 - 8) (1” – No. 4) (3000)
The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2 mass

percent of the design cement content.
Based on 40 kg/bag
405.4.2 Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the

required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around
reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated
shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand.
The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to
properly place it and not by the difficulty in mixing and transporting. The
quantity of mixing water shall be determined by the Engineer and shall not be
varied without his consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the
equipment specified shall be used.
405.4.3 Batching
Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.

1. Portland Cement
Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack

of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is
weighed. All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing
device. The bulk cement weighing hopper shall be properly sealed
and vented to preclude dusting operation. The discharge chute shall
not be suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so
arranged that cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from it.
Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 1 mass

percent.
2. Water
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The

accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of
not more than 1 percent.
3. Aggregates
Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with Subsection

311.2.10. All aggregates whether produced or handled by hydraulic
methods or washed, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining for at
least 12 hours prior to batching. Rail shipment requiring more than12
hours will be accepted as adequate binning only if the car bodies
permit free drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-uniform
moisture content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 hours
may be required by the Engineer.
Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mass percent

maximum tolerance for the required materials.
4. Bins and Scales
The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk cement,
fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing
hopper, and scales capable of determining accurately the mass of
each component of the batch.
Scales shall be accurate to one-half (0.5) percent throughout the
range used.
5. Batching
When batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall be

transported either in waterproof compartments or between the fine
and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in contact with moist
aggregates, batches will be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours
of
such contact. Sacked cement may be transported on top of the

aggregates.
Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and intact. Each

batch shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer without loss, and, when
more than one batch is carried on the truck, without spilling of
material from one batch compartment into another.
6. Admixtures
The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for adding the

specified amount of admixture to each batch and will be responsible
for its uniform operation during the progress of the work. He shall
provide separate scales for the admixtures which are to be
proportioned by weight, and accurate measures for those to be
proportioned by volume. Admixtures shall be measured into the
mixer with an accuracy of plus or minus three (3) percent.
The use of Calcium Chloride as an admixture will not be permitted.
405.4.4 Mixing and Delivery
Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point or

by a combination of central point and truck mixing or by a combination of
central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and delivery of concrete shall
be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO M 157 except
as modified in the following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a
combination of central point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of
concrete shall be regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless
delayed by the placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches
shall not be so great as to allow the concrete inplace to harden partially, and in
no case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes.
In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are

authorized, for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day of pouring,
the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions.
In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture
condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate.
Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6
through 9.
Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scales for

determining the batch weight will be used.
For batch mixing at the site of construction or at a central point, a batch

mixer of an approved type shall be used. Mixer having a rated capacity of less
than a one-bag batch shall not be used. The volume of concrete mixed per
batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity as shown on the
manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer except that an overload up
to 10 percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted, provided
concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are
satisfactory and provided no spillage of concrete takes place. The batch shall
be so charge into the drum that a portion of the water shall enter in advance of
the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water
shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of the mixing period.
Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in
the drum. Mixing time shall not be less than 60 seconds for mixers having a
capacity of 1.5m3 or less. For mixers having a capacity greater than 1.5m 3, the
mixing time shall not be less than 90 seconds. If timing starts, the instant the
skip reaches its maximum raised position, 4 seconds shall be added to the
specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens.
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the

manufacturer’s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the
specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his
own expenses.
The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or

other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each
time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device, the Contractor
will be permitted to continue operations while it is being repaired, provided he
furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If
the timing device is not placed in good working order within 24 hours, further
use of the mixer will be prohibited until repairs are made.
Retempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for increasing

the workability, for retarding the set, or for accelerating the set or improving
the pumping characteristics of the concrete will be permitted only when
specifically provided for in the Contract, or authorized in writing by the
Engineer.
1. Mixing Concrete: General
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved

size and type that will insure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass.
All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers.

Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and placing concrete
shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide a
minimum supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery or in
case the normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply
of concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up
to a construction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer.
Equipment having components made of aluminum or magnesium

alloys, which would have contact with plastic concrete during mixing,
transporting or pumping of Portland Cement concrete, shall not be
used.
Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water storage

and a device of accurately measuring and automatically controlling
the amount of water used.
Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus

provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably
designed and constructed for this purpose. The accuracy of all
weighing devices except that for water shall be such that successive
quantities can be measured to within one percent of the desired
amounts. The water measuring device shall be accurate to plus or
minus 0.5 mass percent. All measuring devices shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. Scales and measuring devices shall be
tested at the expense of the Contractor as frequently as the
Engineer may deem necessary to insure their accuracy.
Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration or

movement of other operating equipment in the plant. When the
entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut -off shall not vary
from the weight designated by the Engineer more than one mass
percent for cement, 1-1/2 mass percent for any size of aggregate, or
one (1) mass percent for the total aggregate in any batch.
2. Mixing Concrete at Site
Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving

blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall be operated
uniformly at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer.
The pick -up and throw-over blades of mixers shall be restored or
replaced when any part or section is worn 20mm or more below the
original height of the manufacturer’s design. Mixers and agitators
which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not be
used.
When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is 0.5m 3 or

more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland Cement shall be
separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The
discharge mechanism of the bulk cement weigh hopper shall be
interlocked against opening before the full amount of cement is in
the hopper. The discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked
against opening when the amount of cement in the hopper is
underweight by more than one (1) mass percent or overweight by
more than 3 mass percent of the amount specified.
When the aggregate contains more water than the quantity

necessary to produce a saturated surface dry condition,
representative samples shall be taken and the moisture content
determined for each kind of aggregate.
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will
enter in advance of cement and aggregate. All water shall be in the
drum by the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time.
Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so that it will
not result in loss of cement due to the effect of wind, or in
accumulation of cement on surface of conveyors or hoppers, or in
other conditions which reduce or vary the required quantity of
cement in the concrete mixture.
The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from the

drum before materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein.
The materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited
simultaneously into the mixer.
All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1-1/2
minutes after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. During
the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it
has been designed.
Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that can

be locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge
mechanics shall be so interlocked that during normal operation no
part of the batch will be charged until the specified mixing time has
elapsed.
The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall

contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and water to coat inside
of the drum without reducing the required mortar content of the mix.
When mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer
shall be thoroughly cleaned.
3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant
Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements for

mixing at the site.
4. Mixing Concrete in Truck
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall

be of the revolving drum type, water -tight, and so constructed that
the concrete can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of
materials throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete
shall be accurately measured and charged into the drum at the
proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck
mixer shall be equipped with a device by which the quantity of water
added can be readily verified. The mixing water may be added
directly to the batch, in which case a tank is not required. Truck
mixers may be required to be provided with a means of which the
mixing time can be readily verified by the Engineer.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the
minimum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer
and stamped in metal on the mixer. Truck mixing, shall, unless
other-wise
directed be continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all
ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall
not be less than 4 rpm, nor more than 6 rpm.
Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been
added either to the water or aggregate, but when cement is charged
into a mixer drum containing water or surface wet aggregate and
when the temperature is above 32oC, this limit shall be reduced to 15
minutes. The limitation in time between the introduction of the
cement to the aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be
waived when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the aggregate is
sufficiently free from moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects
on the cement.
When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing time

specified in Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary mixer may be
reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing completed in a truck mixer.
The mixing time in the truck mixer shall be as specified for truck
mixing.
5. Transporting Mixed Concrete
Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery point in

truck agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed designated by
the manufacturers of the equipment as agitating speed, or in non-
agitating hauling equipment, provided the consistency and
workability of the mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery
point is suitable point for adequate placement and consolidation in
place.
Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s

guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling.
No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete
during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point.
The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck mixers or

agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in
the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open.
When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete to

the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour, or
before 250 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever comes first,
after the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Under
conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete or when the
temperature of the concrete is 30 oC, or above, a time less than one
hour will be required.
6. Delivery of Mixed Concrete
The Contractor shall have sufficient plant capacity and

transportation apparatus to insure continuous delivery at the rate
required. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting
operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling,
placing and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the
interval between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods
of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate
placing of the minimum handling.
The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity
placed and accepted in the completed structure. No deduction will be made for
the volume occupied by pipe less than 100mm (4 inches) in diameter or by
reinforcing steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes or expansion joint materials.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 405.5,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Item listed below
that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing and
finishing concrete including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
Structural Concrete, Class
405 (1) A Cubic Meter
405 (2) B Cubic Meter
405 (3) C Cubic Meter
405 (4) P Cubic Meter
405 (5) Seal Concrete Cubic Meter
ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
STRUCTURES 406.1 Description
This Item shall consist of prestressed concrete structures and the prestressed
concrete portions of composite structures, constructed in reasonably close
conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established
by the Engineer and in accordance with this Specification. It shall also include the
furnishing and installing of any appurtenant items necessary for the particular
prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage
assemblies and grouts used for pressure grouting ducts.

406.2.1 Concrete and Grout
The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to Item 405,
Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P as shown in Table 405.2,
unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
The proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.3.11, Bonding
Steel.
406.2.2 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel
It shall conform to Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
406.2.3 Prestressing Steel
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope.
All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and

rust or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting.
Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall be
rejected.
406.2.4 Packaging, Storing and Shipping
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other shipping

forms for the protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion
during shipping and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other
results of corrosion shall be placed in the package or form, or when permitted
by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor
shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or bond strength of
concrete to steel. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be
immediately replaced or restored to original condition.
This shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement

that the package contains high-strength prestressing steel and the care to be
used in handling, and the type, kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used,
including the date when placed, safety orders and instructions for use.
406.2.5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads
This shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads.
406.2.6 Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4, Water.
406.2.7 Enclosures
Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized ferrous metal

or of a type approved by the Engineer, mortartight and accurately placed at
the locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Transition
couplings connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not be galvanized.
406.2.8 Sampling and Testing
All wire, strand, anchorage assemblies or bars to be shipped to the site

shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for identification purposes.
All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished

and in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same master roll.
All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost
and shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of
anticipated time of use.
The Contractor shall furnish for testing the following samples selected
from each lot, if ordered by the Engineer. The selection of samples will be
made at the manufacturer’s plant by the Engineer or his representative.
For pretensioning work-samples at least 2 m long shall be furnished
of each size of wire or strand proposed.
For post-tensioning work-samples of the following lengths shall be

furnished of each size of wire proposed.
For wire requiring heading, 2 m.

For wires not requiring heading, sufficient length to make up
one parallel-lay cable of 1.50 m long consisting of the same
number of wires as the cable to be furnished.
For strand to be furnished with fittings, 1.50 m between near
ends of fittings.
For bars to be furnished with thread ends and nuts, 1.5 m
between threads at ends.
Anchorage assemblies – If anchorage assemblies are not attached

to reinforcement samples, two (2) anchorage assemblies shall be
furnished, completed with distribution plates of each size and type to
be used.
When prestressing system has been previously tested and approved for similar
projects by an agency acceptable to the Engineer, complete tendon samples need
not be furnished, provided there is no change whatsoever in the materials, design or
details previously approved.
406.3.1 General
Prestressed concrete structural members shall be constructed in

accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and
Reinforcing Steel shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Item
404, Reinforcing Steel, subject to the modifications and amendments
contained herein.
406.3.2 Prestressing Method
The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional with the

Contractor subject to all requirements hereinafter specified.
The Contractor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed, shall
submit to the Engineer for approval complete details of the methods, materials
and equipment he proposes to use in the prestressing operations. Such
details shall outline the method and sequence of stressing, complete
specifications and details of the prestressing, steel and anchoring devices
proposed for use, anchoring stresses, type of enclosures and all other data
pertaining to the prestressing operations, including the proposed arrangement
of the prestressing units in the members, pressure grouting materials and
equipment.
406.3.3 Prestressing Equipment
Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be equipped with either a

pressure gauge or a load cell for determining the jacking stress. The pressure
gauge, if used, shall have an accurate reading dial at least 154 mm (6 inches)
in diameter and each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with the
cylinder extension in the approximate position that it will be at final jacking
force, and shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The load cell,
if used, shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an indicator by means of
which the prestressing force in the tendon may be determined. The range of
the load cell shall be such that the lower ten (10) percent of the manufacturer’s
rated capacity will not be used in determining the jacking stress.
Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent accidents

due to possible breaking of the prestressing steel or the slipping of the grips
during the prestressing process.
406.3.4 Casting Yard
The precasting of prestressed concrete structural members may be

done at a location selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
406.3.5 Placing Enclosures
Enclosures for prestressed reinforcement shall be accurately placed at locations

shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
406.3.6 Placing Steel

Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position shown on the
Plans and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete.
Ducts may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.

Galvanizing of the welded steel will not be required. Ducts shall have sufficient
strength to maintain their correct alignment and shape during placing of
concrete. Joints between sections of ducts shall be positive metallic
connections which do not result in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof
tape shall be used at the connections.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other

suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing.
Ducts for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to

prevent movement.
After installation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be
covered as necessary to prevent the entry of water of debris.
All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented over each

intermediate support, and at additional locations as shown on the Plans. Vents
shall be 12.7
(1/2 inch) minimum diameter standard pipe. Connections to ducts shall be
made with metallic structural fasteners. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped
as necessary, and shall provide means for injection of grout through the vents
and for sealing the vents. Ends of vents shall be removed 25.4 mm (1 inch)
below the roadway surface after grouting has been completed.
Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, ties,

hangers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from contact with
the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shape and dimensions.
Layers of units shall be separated by mortar blocks or other equally suitable
devices. Wooden blocks shall not be left in the concrete.
When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in

ducts after completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are
completed within ten (10) calendar days after the installation of the
prestressing steel, rust which may form during said ten (10) days will not be
caused for rejection of the steel. Prestressing steel, installed, tensioned and
grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) calendar days, shall be subject to all
the requirements in this Item pertaining to corrosion protection and rejection
because of rust.
No welds or grounds for welding equipment shall be made on the forms
or on the steel in the manner after the prestressing steel has been installed.
Wires, wire groups, parallel-lay cables and any other prestressing

elements shall be straightened to insure proper positioning in the enclosures.
Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if required, to

hold the wires in place in true position in the enclosures.
406.3.7 Pretensioning
The prestressing elements shall be accurately held in position and

stressed by jacks. A record shall be kept of the jacking force and the
elongations produced thereby. Several units may be cast in one continuous
line and stressed at one time. Sufficient space shall be left between ends of
units to permit access for cutting after the concrete has attained the required
strength. No bond stress shall be transferred to the concrete, nor end
anchorages released until the concrete has attained a compressive strength,
as shown by cylinder tests, of at least 28 MPa unless otherwise specified. The
elements shall be cut or released in such an order that lateral eccentricity or
prestress will be a minimum.
406.3.8 Placing Concrete
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer has
inspected the placing of the reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages and
prestressing steel and given his approval thereof. The concrete shall be
vibrated with care and in such a manner as to avoid displacement of
reinforcement, conduits, or wires.
Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the

Engineer that all ducts are unobstructed.
406.3.9 Curing
Steam curing process may be used as an alternative to water curing.

The casting bed for any unit cured with steam shall be completely enclosed by
a suitable type of housing, tightly constructed so as to prevent the escape of
steam and simultaneously exclude outside atmosphere. Two to four hours
after placing concrete and after the concrete has undergone initial set, the first
application of steam or radiant heat shall be made unless retarders are used,
in which case the waiting period before application of the steam or radiant
heat shall be increased to from four to six hours.
During the waiting period, the temperature within the curing chamber
shall not be less than 10.0oC (50o F) and live steam or radiant heat may be
used to maintain the curing chamber at the proper minimum temperature. The
steam shall be at 100 percent relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and
to provide moisture for proper hydration of the cement. Application of the
steam shall not be directly on the concrete. During application of the steam, or
of radiant heat, the ambient air temperature shall increase at a rate not to
exceed 4.41oC per hour until the curing temperature is reached. The maximum
curing temperature within the enclosure shall not exceed 71.1 oC. The
maximum temperature shall be held until the concrete has reached the
desired strength. Detensioning shall be accomplished immediately after the
steam curing or the heat curing has been discontinued and additional curing is
not required after detensioning.
1. Curing with Low Pressure Steam
Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete

forms as to cause localized high temperatures.
2. Curing with Radiant Heat
Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, hot

oil or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat curing shall be
done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat and moisture loss shall be
minimized by covering all exposed concrete surfaces with plastic sheeting or
by applying an approved liquid membrane curing compound to all exposed
concrete surfaces. Top surface of concrete members to be used in composite
construction shall be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as
not to reduce bond below design limits.
If the Contractor proposes to cure by any other special method, the

method and its details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
406.3.10 Post-tensioning
Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall not be commenced
until tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and
cured under the same conditions, indicate that the concrete of the particular
member to be prestressed has attained compressive strength of at least 28
MPa unless otherwise specified.
After all concrete has attained the required strength, the prestressing
reinforcement shall be stressed by means of jacks to the desired tension and
the stress transferred to the end anchorage.
Cast-in-place concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least ten (10)

days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be the post-
tensioned and until the compressive strength of said placed concrete has
reached the strength specified for the concrete at the time of stressing.
All side forms for girders shall be removed before post-tensioning. The
falsework under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure shall not be
released until a minimum of 48 hours have elapsed after grouting of the post-
tension tendons nor until all other conditions of the Specifications have been
met. The supporting falsework shall be constructed in such a manner that the
superrestructure will be free to lift off the falsework and shorten during post-
tensioning. Formwork left inside box girders to support the roadway slab shall
be detailed in such a manner so as to offer minimum resistance to girder
shortening due to shrinkage and post-tensioning.
The tensioning process shall be so conducted that the tension being

applied and the elongation of the prestressing elements may be measured at
all times. The friction loss in the element, i.e., the difference between the
tension of
the jack and the minimum tension, shall be determined in accordance with
Article 1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
Suitable shims or other approved devices shall be used to insure that

the specified anchor set loss is attained.
Prestressing tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be

tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon. Such jacking of both ends
need not be done simultaneously.
A record shall be kept of gage pressure and elongation at all times and
submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
406.3.11 Bonding Steel
Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the void

space between the duct and the tendon with grout
.
Grout shall consist of Portland Cement, water and an expansive

admixture approved by the Engineer.
Water shall be potable.
No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used.
Water shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture.
The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that

will produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout. The water content shall be
not more than 19 litres (5 gallons) per sack of cement. Retempering of grout
will not be permitted. Grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of at

least 0.6894 MPa (100 psi).
Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge having a

full-scale reading of not more than 2.07 MPa (300 psi).
Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping pressure

of 1.72 MPa (250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially
grouted ducts shall be provided.
All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would
impair bonding of the grout or interfere with grouting procedures. All grout
shall pass through a screen with a 2 mm (0.0787 inch) maximum clear
openings prior to being introduced into the grout pump.
Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves.
Vents and ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps or other devices
capable of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves and caps shall not be
removed or opened until the grout has set.
Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concrete. All prestressing

steel to be bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt, loose rust, grease or
other deleterious substances.
Immediately after completion of the concrete pour, the metal conduit

shall be blown out with compressed oil free air to the extent necessary to
break up and remove any mortar in the conduit before it hardens.
Approximately 24 hours after the concrete pour, the metal conduits shall be
flushed out with water and then blown out with compressed oil free air.
Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all ducts
are unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been placed, that
the steel is free and unbonded in the duct.
After the tendons have been stressed to the required tension, each
conduit encasing the prestressing steel shall be blown out with compressed oil
free air. The conduit shall then be completely filled from the low end with grout
under pressure. Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously
wasted at the outlet until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the
efflux time of ejected grout is not less than 11 seconds. All vents and openings
shall then be closed and the grouting pressure at the injection end shall be
raised to a minimum of 0.6894 MPa (100 psi) and held for a minimum of 10
seconds.
If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout, it shall be added as

follows:
From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 teaspoons)

shall be added for each sack of cement used in the grout. The exact amount
of aluminum powder will be designated by the Engineer. The dosage per
batch of grout shall be carefully weighed. A number of weighings may be
made in the laboratory and doses placed in glass vials for convenient use in
the mix. The aluminum powder shall be blended with pumicite or other inert
powder in the proportion of one (1) part powder to fifty (50) parts pumicite (or
other inert powder) by weight. The blend shall be thoroughly mixed with the
cement. The amount of the blend used should vary from 120 g (4-1/2 ounces)
per sack of cement for concrete having a temperature of 21.1 oC to 190 g (7
ounces) for a temperature of 4.44 oC after all ingredients are added, the batch
shall be mixed for 3 minutes. Batches of grout shall be placed within 45
minutes after mixing.
406.3.12 Unbonded Steel
Where the steel is not to be bonded to the concrete, it shall be carefully

protected against corrosion by a coating of tar of other waterproofing material,
in addition to any galvanizing which may be specified in addition to the
requirements of ASTM A 416 (AASHTO M 203) and ASTM A 421 (AASHTO M
204.)
406.3.13 Handling
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast

prestressed concrete mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall be
transported in an upright position and the points of support and directions of
the reactions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same
during transportation and storage as when the members are in their final
position. If the Contractor deems it expedient to transport or store precast
units in other than this position, it shall be done at his own risk after notifying
the Engineer of his intention to do so.
Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests on

concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the
same conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the particular
girder has attained a compressive strength equal to the specified design
compressive strength of the concrete in the girder and has attained a
minimum age of 14 days.
406.3.14 Composite Slab Construction
The manufacturing tolerances for pre-cast members shall not exceed

those given for length, cross-section and straightness on the Plans, as
specified in the Contract or as approved by the Engineer. In addition, where
beams are laid side by side in a deck:
The difference on soffit level between adjacent units before the in-
situ concrete is placed shall not exceed 5 mm for units up to 10 mm
for longer units.
The width of the deck soffit shall be within ±25 mm.
In adjacent span, the continuity of the outside beams shall be
maintained.
The width of gap between individual beams shall not exceed twice
the nominal gap.
The alignment of transverse holes shall permit the reinforcement or
prestressing cables to be placed without distortion.
406.4.1 Structural Members
The quantity to be measured for payment will be the actual number of

precast prestressed concrete structural members, except piling, of the several
types and sizes, installed in place, completed and accepted. Each member will
include the concrete, reinforcement and prestressing steel, anchorages,
plates, nuts, elastomeric bearing pads, and other such material contained
within or attached to the unit.
Piling will be measured as provided in Item 400.
406.4.2 Other Items
The quantities of other Contract items which enter into the completed
and accepted structure will be measured for payment in the manner
prescribed for the several items involved.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 406.4 shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below
that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in
this Item.

Descriptio
Pay Item n Unit of Measurement
Number
406 (1) Prestressed Structural Concrete

Members
(Identification) Each
406 (2) Prestressed Concrete Lump Sum
ITEM 407– CONCRETE STRUCTURES
407.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the general description of the materials,

equipment, workmanship and construction requirements of concrete structures
and the concrete portions of composite structures conforming to the
alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details shown on the Plans and in
accordance with the Specifications for piles, reinforcing steel, structural steel,
structural concrete and other items which constitute the completed structure.
The class of concrete to be used in the structure or part of the structure shall
be as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete.
1. Concrete and Concrete Ingredients
Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the requirements in

Item 405, Structural Concrete. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
specified in Special Provisions, concrete shall be of Class A.
2. Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements in Item 404, Reinforcing
Steel.
3. Structural Steel
Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of corresponding

materials in Item 403, Metal Structures.
4. Bridge Bearing (Elastomeric Bearing Pad)
Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing

Pads.
5. Paints
Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 411, Paint.
6. Waterproofing and Dampproofing
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or indicated in Special Provisions,

materials for waterproofing and dampproofing shall conform to the
requirements of the following specifications:
AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for dampproofing and waterproofing.
AASHTO M 116 Primer for the use with Asphalt in dampproofing and
waterproofing.
AASHTO M 117 Woven cotton fabrics saturated with bituminous
substances for use in waterproofing.
AASHTO M 118 Coal-Tar pitch for roofing, dampproofing and water-
proofing.
AASHTO M 121 Creosote for priming coat with coal-tar pitch damp-
proofing and waterproofing.
AASHTO M 159 Woven burlap fabric saturated with bituminous
substances for use in waterproofing.
AASHTO M 166 Numbered cotton duck and array duck.
AASHTO M 239 Asphalt for use in waterproofing membrane
construction.
7. Concrete Curing Compound
Curing compound shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 148

Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete.
8. Joint Filler
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in Special Provisions, materials

for expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of the following
specifications:
AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.
AASHTO M 153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint

fillers for concrete paving and structural construction.
AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured elastic type.
AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving

and structural construction-non-extruding and resilient bituminous
types.
AASHTO M 220 Preformed elastomeric compression joint seals for

concrete.
407.2.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.

This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.
407.3 Construction and Requirements
407.3.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General
Concrete shall not be placed until forms and reinforcing steel have been
checked and approved by the Engineer.
If lean concrete is required in the Plan or as directed by the Engineer

prior to placing of reinforcing steel bar, the lean concrete should have a
minimum compressive strength of 13.8 MPa (2,000 psi)..
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other
construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from inside the
formwork, struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in
correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at their
locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an
elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary members
shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in the
forms within the time stipulated under “Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed
Concrete”.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the

displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes, and pipes
for conveying concrete to the forms shall be permitted only on written
authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer shall reject the use of the
equipment for concrete transportation that will allow segregation, loss of fine
materials, or in any other way will have a deteriorating effect on the concrete
quality.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined; where steep slopes
are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths
that reverse the direction of movement to avoid segregation.
All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings
of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water
used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more

than 1.5 m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or approved
pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during
placing and their lower end shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete.
After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall
be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement bars.
The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position

and the use of vibrators for moving of the mass of fresh concrete shall not be
permitted.
407.3.1.1 Placing Concrete by Pneumatic Means
Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if specified in the

Special Provisions or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so
arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, the

equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The
machine shall be located as close as practicable to the work. The discharge
lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the machine. The discharge
end of the line shall not be more than 3 m from the point of deposit.
At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment shall be

thoroughly cleaned.
407.3.1.2 Placing of Concrete by Pumping
The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if specified or

if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that
vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure the

equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The
operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete
without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete
remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner
that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the
ingredients. After this operation, the entire equipments shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
407.3.1.3 Placing Concrete in Water
Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of the

Engineer and under his immediate supervision. In this case the method of
placing shall be hereinafter specified.
Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A concrete with a minimum

cement content of 400 kg/m 3 of concrete. The slump of the concrete shall be
maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To prevent segregation, concrete shall be
carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie,
a bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and shall not be disturbed
after being placed.
A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 250
mm constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets with a
hopper at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to permit free
movement of the discharge and over the entire top surface of the work and so
as to permit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of
concrete. The discharge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to
prevent water entering the tube and shall be completely submerged in
concrete at all times; the tremie tube shall be kept full to the bottom of the
hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be
induced by lightly raising the discharge end, but always keeping it in the
placed concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed.
When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the top of the
bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely downward and
outward when tripped. The buckets shall be completely filled and slowly
lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface
upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be
withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
407.3.2 Compaction of Concrete

Concrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly
compacted. The concrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall be
placed in horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick except as hereinafter
provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall
be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and
compacted before the preceding layer has taken initial set to prevent injury to
the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between the layers. Each
layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the formation of a construction joint
with a preceding layer.
The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration. The concrete shall be

vibrated internally unless special authorization of other methods is given by
the Engineer or is provided herein. Vibrators shall be of a type, design, and
frequency approved by the Engineer. The intensity of vibration shall be such
as to visibly affect a mass of concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at
least 50 cm. A sufficient number of vibrator shall be provided to properly
compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall
be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of the
forms and shall be applied at the point of placing and in the area of freably
placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted into and withdrawn from the
concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to
compact the concrete thoroughly but shall not be continued so as to cause
segregation and at any one point to the extent that localized areas of grout are
formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced, and not
farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the reinforcement to sections or
layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases
to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the
forms over distances so great as to cause segregation, and vibrators shall not
be used to transport concrete in the forms of troughs or chutes.
407.3.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints
The concrete in each form shall be placed continuously. Placing of

concrete in any such form shall not be allowed to commence unless
sufficiently inspected and approved materials for the concrete is at hand, and
labor and equipment are sufficient to complete the pour without interruption.
Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall be avoided as much as

possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to meet the
approval of the Engineer.
When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete,

after becoming firm enough to retain its shape, shall be cleaned of laitance
and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound
concrete. Where a “faster edge” might be produced at a construction joint, as
in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset formwork shall be used to
produce an edge thickness of not less than 15 cm in the succeeding layer.
Work shall not be discontinued within 50 cm of the top of any face, unless
provision has been made for a coping less than 50 cm thick, in which case if
permitted by the Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the
underside of coping.
Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all

accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surfaces
of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled
into the unset concrete. Care shall be exercised, during the cleaning of the
reinforcing steel, not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the
surface of the concrete.
407.3.4 Casting Box Culverts
In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be placed and allowed to
set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In the construction of
box culverts the side walls and top slab may be constructed as a monolith.
If the concrete in the walls and top slab is placed in two separate
operations, special care shall be exercised in order to secure bonding in the
construction joint and appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for
anchoring the top slab. Each wingwall shall be constructed, if possible, as a
monolith. Construction joints where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so
located that no joints will be visible in the exposed face of the wingwall above
the ground line.
Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the

culverts.
407.3.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders
Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation,

unless otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set for at least 20
hours before the caps are placed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be
placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped
sufficiently to determine the condition of the concrete in the column. The load
of the super-structure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents until they
have been in place at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for

each span unless otherwise provided.
Concrete in T-Beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one

continuous operation unless otherwise directed. If it is permitted to place the
concrete in two separate operations, each of the operations, shall be
continuous: first, to the top of the girder stems, and second, to completion. In
the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be secured by means of
suitable shear keys which may be formed by the use of timber blocks
approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in cross-section having a length of 100 mm
less than the width of the girder stem. These key blocks shall be placed along
the girder stems as required, but the spacing shall not be greater than 300 mm
center to center. The blocks shall be beveled and oiled in such a manner as to
insure their ready removal, and they shall be removed as soon as the concrete
has set sufficiently to retain its shape. If the contractor wishes to place the
concrete in two separate operations, he shall, with his request for permission
to do so, submit plans and proposals of the required changes to the
reinforcement, which plans and proposals shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
In box girders, the concrete in the bottom slab be poured first, as a

separate operation.
The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one
continuous operation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to place the
concrete in more than one operation, the requirements for T-beam shall apply.
407.3.6 Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans or

called for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Shear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise specified, to
transmit shear or to bond the two sections together.
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has

hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surface of the hardened
concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will
not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the surface. It
shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance. When directed by
the Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete which will be in contact
with new concrete shall be washed with water to this satisfaction, and to
insure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the hardened and the newly
deposited concrete, the cleaned and saturated surfaces, including vertical and
inclined surfaces shall first be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar of
the same proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete used against
which the new concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has
attained its initial set.
The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint.

The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully
finished true to line and elevation.
407.3.7 Concrete Surface Finishing
Surface finishing shall be classified as follows:
Class 1, Ordinary Finish

Class 2, Rubbed Finish
Class 3, Floated Finish
All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and additionally any
further finish as specified.
Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given a

Class 2, Rubbed Finish.
The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls.

The outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets,
curbs, headwalls, railings, arch rings, spandrel walls and parapets.
Excluded, however, are the tops and bottoms of floor slabs and sidewalks,
bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior beams and girders, backwalls
above bridge seats or the underside of copings. The surface finish on piers
and abutments shall include all exposed surfaces below the bridge seats to 20
cm below low water elevation or 50 cm below finished ground level when such
ground level is above the water surface. Wingwalls shall be finished from the
top to 50 cm below the finished slope lines on the outside face and shall be
finished on top and for a depth of 20 cm below the top on the back sides.
Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the traveled way shall be

Class 3, Floated Finish.
Class 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish
Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular

protection shall be removed from all surface except from those which are not
to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the cavities
produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners
or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been
kept saturated with water for a period of not less than three hours shall be
carefully pointed and made true with a mortar of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the proportions used in the grade of the concrete being finished.
Mortar used in pointing shall not be more than one hour old. The mortar
patches shall be cured as specified under Subsection 407.3.8. All construction
and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and
free of all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full
length with a clean and true edges.
The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces,
the appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be “rubbed”
as specified below.
Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish
After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon

as its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work, the concrete
shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three
hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the
mortar used in the pointing of road holes and defects to thoroughly set.
Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed with a minimum coarse carborundum
stone using a small amount of mortar on each face. The mortar shall be
composed of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportions used in the
concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks,
protections and irregularities have been removed, all voids have been filled,
and a uniform surface has been obtained. The face produced by this rubbing
shall be left in place at this time.
After all concrete above the surface being created has been cast, the
final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and
water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of smooth
texture and uniform color.
After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it should
be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left free from all
unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.
Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish
After the concrete is compacted as specified in Subsection 407.3.2,

Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully struck off with a strike
board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on the Plans. Proper
allowance shall be made for camber if required. The strike board may be
operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be moved forward with a
combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation being such
that neither is raised from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of
concrete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times.
After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface shall
be made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating or both. Longitudinal
floating will be required except in places where this method is not feasible.
The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked with a
sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road centerline
and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. The float
shall then be moved forward one -half of each length and the above operation
repeated. Machine floating which produces an equivalent result may be
substituted for the above manual method.
The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting

at the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the edge. The
float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and the above
operation repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown and cross-
section of the pavement.
After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water
removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested
for trueness with a straight-edge. For the purpose, the Contractor shall furnish
and use an accurate 3 m straight-edge swing handless 1 m longer than one
half the width of the slab.
The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the
road centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone over
from one side of the slab to the other as necessary advancement along the
deck shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the
straight-edge. Any depression found shall be immediately filled with freshly
mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. The straight-edge
testing and refloating shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free
from observable departure from the straight-edge and the slabs has the
required grade and contour, until there are no deviations of more than 3 mm
under the 3 m straight-edge.
When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be given a
broom finish. The broom shall be an approved type. The strokes shall be
square across the slabs from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly
overlapped, and shall be made by drawing the broom without tearing the
concrete, but so as to produce regular corrugations not over 3 mm in depth.
The surface as thus finished shall be free from porous spots, irregularities,
depressions and small pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by
accidental disturbing, during the final brooming of particles of coarse
aggregate embedded near the surface.
Concrete Surface Finish for Sidewalk.
After the concrete has been deposited in place, it shall be compacted

and the surface shall be struck off by means of strike board and floated with a
wooden or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on all edges and at all
expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more than 3 mm under a 3 m
straight-edge. The surface shall have a granular or matted texture which will
not slick when wet.
407.3.8 Curing Concrete
All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with this

Specification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The curing method
shall be one or more of the following:
1. Water Method
The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of
water for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been
placed.
The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by applying

water with an atomizing nozzle. Cotton mats, rugs, carpets, or earth
or sand blankets may be used to retain the moisture. At the
expiration of the curing period the concrete surface shall be cleared
of the curing medium.
2. Curing Compound
Surfaces exposed to the air may be cured by the application of an

impervious membrane if approved by the Engineer.
The membrane forming compound used shall be practically

colorless liquid. The use of any membrane-forming compound that
will alter the natural color of the concrete or impart a slippery surface
to any wearing surface shall be prohibited. The compound shall be
applied with a pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the
entire concrete surface with a uniform film and shall be of such
character that it will harden within 30 minutes after application. The
amount of compound applied shall be ample to seal the surface of
the concrete thoroughly. Power-operated spraying equipment shall
be equipped with an operational pressure gauge and means of
controlling the pressure.
The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete following the

surface finishing operation immediately after the moisture sheen
begins to disappear from the surface, but before any drying
shrinkage or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of any delay,
in the application of the curing compound, which results in any
drying or cracking of the surface, application of water with an
atomizing nozzle as specified under “Water Method”, shall be started
immediately and shall be continued until the application of the
compound is resumed or started, however, the compound shall not
be applied over any resulting free standing water. Should the film of
compound be damaged from any cause before the expiration of 7
days after the concrete is placed in the case of structures, the
damaged portion shall be repaired immediately with additional
compound.
Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any manner
after manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a
thoroughly mixed condition. If the compound has not been used
within 120 days after the date of manufacture, the Engineer may
require additional testing before the use to determine compliance to
requirements.
An anti-setting agent or a combination of anti-setting agents shall

be incorporated in the curing compound to prevent caking.
The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel

containers or shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located
on the Site. Storage tank shall have a permanent system designed
to completely redisperse any settled material without introducing air
or any other foreign substance. Containers shall be well-sealed with
ring seals and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall
be of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound.
Each container shall be labeled with a manufacturer’s name,
specification number, batch number, capacity and date of
manufacture, and shall have label warning concerning flammability.
The label shall also warn that the curing compound shall be well
-stirred before use. When the curing compound is shipped in tanks
or tank trunks, a shipping invoice shall accompany each load. The
invoice shall contain the same information as that required herein for
container labels.
Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source

of supply and on the Site.
3. Waterproof Membrane Method
The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be sprayed with

water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a
spray is formed until the concrete has set, after which a curing
membrane of waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be placed.
The curing membrane shall remain in place for a period of not less
than 72 hours.
Waterproof paper and plastic sheeting shall conform to the

specification of AASHTO M 171.
The waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be formed into
sheets of such width as to cover completely the entire concrete
surface.
All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented together in

such a manner as to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams
shall have a minimum lap of 100 mm.
The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a bank of

earth on the edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to
the Engineer.
Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged within 72

hours after being placed, the broken or damaged portions shall be
immediately repaired with new sheets properly cemented into place.
Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof qualities

or have been damaged to such an extent as to render them unfit for
curing, the concrete shall not be used.
4. Forms-in-Place Method
Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the form-

in-place. The forms shall remain in place for a minimum period of 7
days after the concrete has been placed, except that for members
over 50 cm in least dimensions, the forms shall remain in place for a
minimum period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by
watering during the curing period.
5. Curing Cast-In-Situ Concrete
All newly placed concrete for cast-in-situ structures, other than

highway bridge deck, shall be cured by the water method, the forms-
in-place method, or as permitted herein, by the curing compound
method, all in accordance with the requirements of Subsection,
407.3.8 Curing Concrete.
The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces

which are to be buried under ground and surfaces where only
Ordinary Surface Finish is to be applied and on which a uniform
color is not required and which will not be visible from public view.
The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by either

the curing compound method or the water method. The curing
compound shall be applied progressively during the deck finishing
operations. The water cure shall be applied not later than 4 hours
after completion of the deck finishing.
When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot

weather, water shall be applied to concrete surface being cured by
the curing compound method or by the forms- in-place method until
the Engineer determine that a cooling effect is no longer required.
6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles)
Pre -cast concrete members shall be cured for not less than 7
days by the water method or by steam curing. Steam curing for pre-
cast members shall conform to the following provisions:
a. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a

minimum 4-hour pre-steaming period.
b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the pre-

steaming period, members shall be covered immediately after
casting or the exposed surface shall be kept wet by fog spray or
wet blankets.
Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of steam

about the member and shall be constructed to contain the live
steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use of tarpaulins or
similar flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in
good condition and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss
of steam and moisture.
Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition.

Steam jets shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test
cylinders, or forms. During application of the steam, the
temperature rise within the enclosure shall not exceed 20 oC per
hour. The curing temperature throughout the enclosure shall not
exceed 65oC and shall be maintained at a constant level for a
sufficient time necessary to develop the required compressive
strength. Control cylinders shall be covered to prevent moisture
loss and shall be placed in a location where temperature of the
enclosure will be the same as that of the concrete.
Temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate

continuous permanent record of the curing temperature shall be
provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per 50
m of continuous bed length will be required for checking
temperature.
Curing of pre-cast concrete will be considered completed after

the termination of the steam curing cycle.
7. Curing Pre-cast Concrete Piles
All newly placed concrete for pre -cast concrete piles,

conventionally reinforced or prestressed shall be cured by the
“Water Method” as described in Subsection 407.3.8, Curing
Concrete, except that the concrete shall be kept under moisture for
at least 14 days. At the option of the Contractor, stream curing may
be used in which case the steam curing provisions of Subsection
407.3.8 (6), Curing Pre -Cast Concrete (except piles) shall apply
except that the concrete shall be kept wet for at least 7 days
including the holding and steaming period.
407.3.9 Falsework Design and Drawings
Detailed working drawings and supporting calculations of the false work

shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer. No falsework
construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and approved the
design. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer to
complete this review. Such time shall be proportionate to the complexity of the
falsework design and in no case be less than two weeks.
The Contractor may review the falsework drawings at any time provided
sufficient time is allowed for the Engineer’s review before construction is
started on the revised portion.
Assumptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not be

limited to the following:
The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the railing,

shall be considered to be placed at one time, except when in the
opinion of the Engineer, a portion of the load is carried by
members previously cast and having attained a specified
strength.
The loading used on timber piles shall not exceed the bearing
value for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20 tonne per pile.
Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall be
designated by the Contractor on the falsework drawings.
Falsework footings shall be designed to carry the loads imposed
upon them without exceeding estimated soil bearing values or
allowable settlements.
The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks, brackets,
columns and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the
manufacture’s recommendations. If requested by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall furnish catalogue or other data verifying
these recommendations.
If the concrete is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be
designed to support any increased or readjusted loads caused by
the prestressing forces.
Joints supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as
falsework and designed as such.
For the construction of falsework over and adjacent to roadways where

falsework openings are required for maintaining traffic, the Contractor shall
provide any additional features for the work needed to insure that the
falsework will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles.
The falsework design at the locations where said openings are required
shall include but not be limited to the following minimum provisions:
a. Each exterior stringer in a span shall be securely

anchored to the following cap or framing.
b. Adequate bracing shall be used during all stages of falsework

construction and removal over or adjacent to public traffic.
c. Falsework members shall be at least 300 mm clear of temporary

protective railing members.
The falsework drawings shall include a superstructure placing diagram

showing proposed concrete placing sequence and construction joint locations,
except that where a schedule for placing concrete is shown on the Contract
Plans, no deviation will be permitted there from unless approved in writing by
the Engineer.
The falsework drawings shall show pedestrian openings which are

required through the falsework.
Anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms shall be indicated

by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. These should include falsework
footing settlements over 20 mm will not be allowed unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer. Deck slab forms between girders shall be constructed with no
allowance for settlement relative to the girders.
Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stresses

deflections, and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in all
load supporting members shall be supplied.
After approving the Contractor’s falsework deflection camber, the

Engineer will furnish to the Contractor the amounts of camber necessary to
compensate for vertical alignment or anticipated structure deflection, if these
are not shown on the drawings. The total camber used in constructing
falsework shall be the sum of the aforementioned cambers.
407.3.10 Falsework Construction
The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the falsework

drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of the
quantity and quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed. The
workmanship used in falsework shall be of such quality that the falsework will
support the loads imposed on it without excessive settlement or take-up
beyond that shown on the falsework drawings.
When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven to a

bearing value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown on the
falsework drawings.
Suitable jacks or wedges shall be used in connection with falsework to set the forms
to their required grade and to take up any excessive settlement in the falsework
either before or during the placing of concrete.
The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit forms easily
readable and in enough systematically-placed locations to determine the total
settlement of the entire portion of the structure where concrete is being
placed.
Should unanticipated events occur, including settlements that deviate

more than ±20 mm from those indicated on the falsework drawings, which in
the opinion of the Engineer would prevent obtaining a structure conforming to
the requirement of the Specification, the placing of concrete shall be
discontinued until corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer are
provided. In the event satisfactory measures are not provided prior to initial set
of the concrete in the affected area, the placing of concrete shall be
discontinued at a location determined by the Engineer. All unacceptable
concrete shall be removed.
407.3.11 Removing Falsework
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the Engineer,

falsework supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not be released
before 14 days after the last concrete, excluding concrete above the bridge
deck, has been placed. Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or
rigid frame bridge shall not be released before 14 days after the last concrete
excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been placed in that span and
in the adjacent portions of each adjoining span for a length equal to at least
half the length of the span where falsework is to be released.
Falsework supporting deck overhangs and deck slabs between girders

shall not be released until 7 days after the deck concrete has been placed.
In addition to the above requirements, no falsework for bridges shall be

released until the supported concrete has attained a compressive strength of
at least 80% of the required 28-day strength. Falsework for cast-in place
prestressed portion of structure shall not be released until after the
prestressing steel has been tensioned.
All falsework materials shall be completely removed. Falsework piling

shall be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the original ground or
stream bed. When falsework piling is driven within the limits of ditch or
channel excavation areas, the falsework piling within such areas shall be
removed to at least 50 cm below the bottom and side slopes of said excavated
areas.
All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site
left in a neat and presentable condition.
407.3.12 Formwork Design and Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare drawings and materials data for the
formwork and shutters to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval unless otherwise directed.
The requirements for design of formwork are the same as described

under Section 407.3.9.
407.3.13 Formwork Construction
Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines and

grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape and
surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions
shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and with the surface finish as
specified.
Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance with the

approved Plans.
The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and
foreign material. Forms which will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated
with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of commercial quality form oil or
other approved coating which will permit the ready release of the forms and
will not discolor the concrete.
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in connection
with constructing the forms has been completed, all materials required for the
unit to be poured, and the Engineer has inspected and approved said forms
and materials. Such work shall include the removal of all dirt, chips, sawdust
and other foreign material from the forms.
The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent

bulging of the forms or form panels in excess of the deflections permitted by
the Specification.
Forms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely enclosed or
hidden below the permanent ground surface shall conform to the requirements
herein for forms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces of underground
drainage structures shall be completely enclosed surfaces.
Formwork for concrete place under water shall be watertight. When

lumber is used, this shall be planed, tongued and grooved.
Forms for exposed concrete surface shall be designed and constructed

so that the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate excessively in
any direction between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales.
Undulations exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the center to center distance
between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales will be
considered to be excessive. Should any form of forming system, even though
previously approved for use, produce a concrete surface with excessive
undulations, its use shall be discontinued until modifications satisfactory to the
Engineer have been made. Portions of concrete structures with surface
undulations in excess of the limits herein specified may be rejected by the
Engineer.
All exposed surfaces of similar portions of a concrete structure shall be

formed with the same forming material or with materials which produce similar
concrete surface textures, color and appearance.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of even

thickness and width and with uniform texture. The materials shall have sharp
edges and be mortar-tight.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular fillets at

least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent mortar runs and to produce
smooth straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete.
Form fasteners consisting of form bolts, clamps or other devices shall

be used as necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during concrete
placement. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold forms in
position will not be permitted.
Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting
forms or for lifting precast members. The use of driven types of anchorage for
fastening forms of form supports to concrete will not be permitted.
407.3.14 Removal of Forms and Falsework

Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the
Engineer. The Engineer’s consent shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed
at the time the forms are removed and in no case shall any portion of the
wood forms be left in the concrete.
Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be as

directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is gradually
subjected to its working stress.
When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and
supports, such removal should not begin until the concrete has attained the
percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table below.
Minimum Time Minimum Percentage

Design Strength
Centering under girders,
beams frames or arches 14 days 80%
Floor slabs 14 days 70%
Walls 1 day 70%
Columns 2 days 70%
Sides of beams and all
other vertical surfaces 1 day 70%
In continuous structures, falsework shall not be released in any span

until the first and second adjoining spans on each side have reached the
strength specified herein, or in the Special Specifications. When cast-in-place
post tensioned bridges are constructed, falsework shall remain in place until
all post tensioning has been accomplished.
Falsework under all spans of continuous structures shall be completely

released before concrete is placed in railings and parapets. In order to
determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall be removed from
columns before releasing supports from beneath beams and girders.
Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete without
first determining if the concrete has gained adequate strength without regard
to the time element. In the absence of strength determination, the forms and
falsework are to remain in place until removal is permitted by the Engineer.
The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or cribs may be

left in place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal would
endanger the safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms so left intact
will not be exposed to view in the finished structure. All other forms shall be
removed whether above or below the ground line or water level.
All forms shall be removed from the cells of concrete box girders in
which utilities are present and all formwork except that necessary to support
the deck slab shall be removed from the remaining cells of the box girder.
To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing, parapets

and exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not less than 12 nor more
than 48 hours, depending upon weather conditions. In order to determine the
condition of concrete in columns, forms shall always be removed from them
before the removal of shoring from beneath beams and girders.
Falsework and centering for spandrel-filled arches not be struck until

filling at the back of abutments has been placed up to the spring line.
Falsework supporting the deck of rigid frame structure shall not be removed
until fills have been placed back to the vertical legs.
The quantity of structural steel, structural concrete, reinforcing steel or

other Contract Pay Items shall constitute the completed and accepted
structure which shall be measured for payment in the manner prescribed in
the several items involved.
The quantities measured as provided in Section 407.4, Method of

Measurement shall be paid for at the contract price for the several pay items
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing,
fabricating, placing, curing and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item. Such payment shall constitute full payment
for the completed structure ready for use.
Pay Item Number Description Unit

of Measurement
405 (1) Concrete Class A, C & P Cubic Meter
405 (2) Concrete Post/Baluster Each
Railings Linear Meter
405 (3) Parapet Walls Cubic Meter
400 Piling Linear Meter
103 Structure Excavation Cubic Meter
601 Sidewalk Concrete Square Meter or
Cubic Meter
404 Reinforcing Steel Bars Kilogram
407 (1) Lean Concrete Cubic Meter
When more than one item is specified, means of identification shall be

inserted in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter suffixes shall
be included within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number.
ITEM 409 – WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL
409.1 Description
This work shall consist of the joining of structural steel members with
welds of the type, dimensions, and design shown on the Plans and in
accordance with the Specifications.
It is the intent of this Specification to provide for work of a quality
comparable to that required under the Standard Specifications for Welded
Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. In case of
dispute or for situations not adequately provided for in this Specification, those
designated Standard Specifications shall be considered as the final authority
and shall govern except as amended by the Special Provisions.
Welding of Structural Steel shall be done only when shown on the Plans
or authorized in writing by the Engineer.
409.2 Materials Requirements
Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric furnace

steel conforming to AASHTO M 183.
All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of

American Welding Society Specifications. Electrodes shall be of classification
numbers E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the positions, type of current
and polarity, and other conditions of intended use, and to conform to any
special requirements indicated on the Plans.
Filler material to be used in the repair or strengthening of old structures

or for joining new parts to existing steel members, shall be adopted to the
material to be welded and may depart from the foregoing requirements only if
agreed by the Engineer.
409.3.1 Equipment
409.3.1.1 General
All items of equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so designed
and manufactured and in such condition as to enable qualified welders to
follow the procedures and attain the results prescribed in this Specification.
409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipment

Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly for
welding. They shall be capable of delivering steady currents adjustable
through a range ample for the work requirements. They shall respond
automatically and quickly to changes in power requirements due to variations
in arc length and shall deliver full current promptly on striking an arc.
Welding cable shall have sufficient conductivity to avoid overheating

and inadequate current at the arc and shall be effectively insulated against
welding circuit voltage. Earth or ground connections and circuits shall be
secured and adequate to carry the welding currents.
Electrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good electrical
contact.
Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable auxiliary

handling equipment to provide automatic instead of manual control of
electrode and welding arc.
409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment
Torches and tips shall be of proper size and type of the work at hand.
Suitable regulators shall afford the welder complete control over the pressure
and rate of flow of each gas.
409.3.1.4 Protective Equipment
All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American

Standard Association Code for such equipment.
The Contractor shall enforce the use of approved accessories

necessary for the protection and convenience of the welders and for the
proper and efficient execution of the work.
Suitable protection against the light of the arc shall be maintained by the
Contractor when arc-welding operation might be viewed within harmful range
by persons other than the actual welders and inspectors.
409.3.2 Welding
409.3.2.1 General
Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc process, using the

electrodes specified with either direct or alternating current.
Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins,

tears, and other defects which would adversely affect the quality of the weld.
Edges of material shall be trimmed by machining, chipping, grinding, or
machine gas -cutting to produce a satisfactory welding edge wherever such
edge is thicker than: 13 mm for sheared edge of material; 16 mm for toes of
angles or rolled shapes (other than wide flange sections); 25 mm for universal
mill plate or edges of flange sections.
The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm for parts
less than 10 mm in thickness nor more than 3 mm for parts 10 mm or more in
thickness.
Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will lie in
gradual transition curves. For butt welded joints between base metal parts of
unequal thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope or level not
greater than 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition may be
provided by sloping the surface of the weld metal or by bevelling the thicker
part or by combination of these two methods.
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease
or other material that will prevent proper welding. Mill scale that withstands
vigorous wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust inhibitive coating may
remain. Surfaces within 50 mm of any weld location shall be free of any paint
or other material that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable
fumes while welding.
No operation or actual welding or gas-cutting shall be performed on a

member while it is carrying live load stress or while subject to shock and
vibration and from moving loads. Welding and gas-cutting shall cease in
advance of the application of such loads.
409.3.2.2 Welders
All welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced and
fully qualified welders.
409.3.2.3 Preparation of Materials for Welding
Dimensional tolerance, straightness and flatness of the structural

shapes and plates shall be within the limits prescribed in this Specification.
Structural steel which is to be welded shall preferably not be painted

until all welding is completed.
Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable, be

done by machine gas-cutting. Machine gas- cutting edges shall be
substantially as smooth and regular as those produced by edge planning and
shall be left free of slag. Manual gas cutting shall be permitted only where
machine gas-cutting is not practicable and with the approval of the Engineer.
The edge resulting from manual gas-cutting shall be inspected and smoothed
with special care. All re-entrant corners shall be filleted to a radius at least 19
mm. The cut lines shall not extend beyond the fillet and all cutting shall follow
closely the line prescribed.
409.3.2.4 Assembly
The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close

contact as practicable, and no event shall be separated more than 5 mm. If
the separation is 1.5 mm or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased
by the amount of separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap
joints and of butt joints landing on a backing structure shall not exceed 1.5
mm. The fit of joints which are not sealed by welds throughout their length
shall be sufficiently close to exclude water after painting. Where irregularities
in rolled shape or plates, after straightening, do not permit contact within the
above limits, the procedure necessary to bring the material within these limits
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be carefully aligned.

Where the parts are effectively restrained against bending due to eccentricity
or alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the thickness or the thinner
part joined, but in no case more than 3 mm, may be permitted as a departure
from the theoretical alignment. In connecting alignment in such cases, the
parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope than two degrees (1 in 30).
Measurement of offset shall be between centerline of parts unless otherwise
shown on the Plans.
When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, the joint shall be
of such form that the slope of either surface through the transition zone does
not exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being bevelled, if necessary.
Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held

in position by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other suitable devices
or tack welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs and fixtures is
recommended where practicable. Such fastening devices as may be used
shall be adequate to insure safety.
Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to
prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts.
The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be less than the
thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25
times the thickness of the weld.
The minimum center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the
diameter of the hole.
The length of the slot for a slot weld not exceed ten times the thickness
of the weld. The width of the slot shall not be less than the thickness of the
part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the
thickness of the weld.
The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners
rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except
those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to

their length shall be 4 times the width of the slot. The minimum center to
center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be 2 times the
length of the slot.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in

thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 16
mm in thickness, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material but
not less than 16 mm.
Tack welds, located where the final welds will later be made, shall be
subject to the same quality requirements as the final weld. Tack welds shall be
as small as practicable and where encountered in the final welding, shall be
cleaned and fused thoroughly with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken
tack welds shall be removed before final welding.
Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled and

matchmarked prior to erection to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of
position on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be removed from any
surface to be welded.
409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses
In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built-up member and

in welding reinforcing parts to existing members, the procedure and sequence
of welding shall be such as will avoid distortion and minimize shrinkage
stresses.
As far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on a part or member

shall be executed concurrently, and all welds shall be deposited in a sequence
that will balance the applied heat of welding on various sides as much as
possible while the welding progresses.
Before the commencement of welding on a structural member in which

severe shrinkage stresses or distortion are likely to occur, a complete program
for welding sequence and distortion control shall be submitted to the Engineer
and shall be subject to his approval.
The direction of the general progression in welding on a member shall

be from points where parts are relatively fixed in position, with respect to each
other, toward points which have a greater relative freedom of movement.
Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid

structure or assembly, the connection at which the greatest shrinkage will
occur in the direction of the length of the part or member, shall be made while
the part or member is free to move in the direction of the shrinkage; and the
connection involving the least shrinkage shall be made last.
A weld designed to sustain tensile stress shall be made in such a way
that their welding is being performed at any point, all parts that would offer
restraint against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move enough to preclude
serious shrinkage stresses.
In welding of built-up members of heavy sections, particularly those T or

H-shapes where the flanges are considerably heavier than the stems or webs,
and in any case where the component parts are 38 mm or greater in
thickness, special care shall be exercised during welding to avoid weld
cracking. In the welding of members of such heavy section, the temperature of
contiguous areas about a welding operation shall be equal, and not less than
55oC. If necessary, the lighter parts shall be heated while the weld is cooling,
to keep the temperature of contiguous parts substantially equal.
In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop

splices in each component part shall be made before such component part is
welded to other parts of the member.
In making all butt-welded splices in rolled shapes and in making butt-

welded field splices in built-up sections (such as in H or I-sections) the
sequence and procedure of welding shall be such as to take into account
unequal amounts of expansion or contraction in the parts being welded. The
procedure and sequence shall be such that while the weld and the heated
base metal are contracting at any point, any part of the member that would
furnish restraint against such contraction can move or shrink enough to
prevent the shrinkage of the heated metal from producing harmful internal
stresses. The procedure and sequence that is used for making such splices
shall be planned in advance in full detail and submitted to the Engineer and
shall be subject to his approval.
The ends of all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall be
made with extension bars regardless of the thickness of such flanges.
Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet from condensation or
rain which is falling on the surfaces to be welded; nor during periods of high
winds unless the welding operator and the work are properly protected.
409.3.2.6 Technique of Arch-Welding
The welding current shall conform with respect to voltage and current
(and polarity, of direct current is used) to the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the electrode being used, as indicated in the instructions that
are included with each container of electrodes.
Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited to the
thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances attendant to the
work.
The maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm with the

following exceptions:
The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes except the
root pass shall be 8 mm.
The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm.
The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root passes of all
multiple layer welds in all cases shall be of the proper size to insure thorough
fusion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions.
A single layer of the weld metal, whether deposited-in one pass or

made up of several parallel beads, shall not exceed 3 mm in thickness except
that the bead at the root may be 6 mm in thickness if the position of welding
and the viscosity of the weld metal permit control of the latter so that it does
not over flow upon unfused base metal.
The maximum size of fillet weld which may be made in one pass shall be 8
except that for vertical welds made upward the maximum size made in
one pass shall be 13 mm.
In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the bottom
upward. Succeeding passes may be formed by any technique that will fulfill
the requirements of the Specification and Plans.
The electrode manipulation during welding shall insure that:
Complete fusion between the base metal and the deposited weld
metal is obtained.
The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal so that no
undercut remains along the edges of the finished weld.
The molten weld metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the surface
behind the advancing arc.
Each time the arc is started, either to begin a weld or to continue partly
completed weld, the arch shall be manipulated to obtain complete fusion of the
deposited weld metal with the base metal and with any previously deposited
weld metal, before any progression of the arc along the joint.
At the completion of a pass or weld, the arc shall be manipulated so as

to fill the crater with sound metal.
Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be

removed and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean. This
requirement shall apply not only to cratered areas but also when welding is
resumed after any interruption. It shall not, however, restrict the making of
plug and slot welds, in accordance with the following paragraphs.
In making plug welds the following techniques shall be used:
For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root of the joint
and then weaved along a spiral path to the center of the hole, fusing
and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root and bottom of the
joint. The arc shall then be carried to the periphery of the hole, and
the procedure repeated, fusing and depositing successive layers to
fill the hole to the depth required. The slag covering the weld metal
shall be kept molten, or nearly so, until the weld is finished. If the arc
is broken, except briefly for changing electrodes, the slag must be
allowed to cool and shall be completely removed before restarting
the weld.
For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of the joint, at
the lower side of the hole and carried upward on the zigzag path,
depositing a layer about 5 mm thick on the exposed face at the
thinner plate and fused to it and to the side of the hole. After
cleaning the slag from the weld, other layers shall be similarly
deposited to fill the hole to the required depth.
For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for flat
welds except that the slag shall be allowed to cool and shall be
completely removed after depositing each successive layer until the
hole is filled to the required depth.
Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified

above for plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three times
the width, or if the slot extends to the edges of the part of the technique
specified above for making plug welds shall be followed for the type of flat
position welds.
409.3.2.7 Details of Welds
The following tabulation shows that the relation between weld size and
the maximum thickness of material on which various sizes of fillet welds may
be used:
Size of Fillet Weld Maximum Thickness of Part

5 mm 13 mm
6 mm 19 mm
8 mm 32 mm
10 mm 51 mm
13 mm 152 mm
16 mm over 152 mm
The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge of
material 6 mm or more in thickness shall be 1.5 mm less than the thickness of
the material.
The minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its size
and in no case less than 38 mm.
Fillet welds terminating at the corners of parts or members shall,

wherever practicable, be turned continuously full size around the corners for a
distance not less than twice the nominal size of the weld.
Intermittent fillet welds, preferably, shall not be used. They shall be
permitted only where the required weld area is less than that of a continuous
fillet weld of the minimum size. If used on main members, they shall be chain
intermittent welds. In all other cases, chain intermittent welding is preferable to
staggered intermittent welding.
Spacing of intermittent fillet welds shall be measured between the

center of the weld segments. The spacing shall conform to the following
requirements unless calculated stresses between the parts require closer
spacing:
At the end of members, there shall preferably be continuous

longitudinal fillet welds at least as long as the width of the element or
member being connected.
The clear spacing in the direction of stress of stitch welds that

connect plates to other plates or to shapes shall not exceed:
For compression members ….10 times the thickness of the

thinner part but not more than 300 mm.
For tension members ….. 14 times the thickness of the thinner
part but not more than 300 mm.
The spacing transverse to the direction of stress shall not
exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part connected.
For members composed of two or more rolled shapes in contact with

one another, the longitudinal spacing of stitch welds shall not exceed
600 mm.
Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints
or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The fillet welds in a
hole or slot may overlap.
Seal welding shall preferably be accomplished by a continuous weld

combining the function of sealing and strength, changing sections only as the
required strength may necessitate.
Exposed faces of welds shall be made reasonably smooth and regular,

shall conform as closely as practicable to the design requirements and shall
not at any place be inside the intended cross-section. Weld dimension in
excess of the
design requirements shall not be a cause for rejection, but in case excess
weld metal involves serious malformation, such work shall be rejected.
All fillet welds shall be of acceptable types. All fillet welds that carry
reversed stresses running in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal axis
shall be of the concave type or the 0-gee type when the fillet weld is flushed
with the edge of a member. When one of these types is specifically indicated
on the Plans for a weld, it shall be of that type.
Butt welds shall preferably be made with a slight reinforcement, except

as may be otherwise provided, and shall have no defects. The height of
reinforcement shall be not more than 3 mm.
All butt welds, except produced with aid of backing material, shall have
the root of the initial layer chipped out or otherwise cleaned to sound metal
and welded in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. Butt
welds made with the use of a backing of the same materials as the base metal
shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the backing materials.
Ends of butt welds shall be extended past the edges of the parts joined
by means of extension bars providing a similar joint preparation and having a
width not less than the thickness of the thicker part jointed; or for material 19
mm or less in thickness, the ends of the welds shall be chipped or cut down to
solid metal and side welds applied to fill out the ends to the same
reinforcement as the face of the welds. Extension bars shall be removed upon
completion and cooling of the weld and the ends of the weld made smooth
and flush with the edges of the abutting parts.
409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds
Weld metal shall be solid throughout except that very small gas pockets
and small inclusions of oxide or slag may be accepted if well dispersed and if
none exceeds 1.5 mm in greatest dimension, and if the sum of the greatest
dimensions of all such defects of weld metal area does not exceed 15 mm in
an area of 10 cm 2.
There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base
metal and between successive passes throughout the joint.
Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from
undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the welds.
409.3.2.9 Correction
In lieu of rejection of an entire piece of member containing welding

which is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship, the following
corrective measures may be permitted by the Engineer whose specific
approval shall be obtained for making each correction:
Removal of part or all of the welds shall be affected by chipping,

grinding or gas-gouging.
Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by removing

and replacing the welds, or as follows:
Excessive convexity – Reduce to size by removal of excess weld

metal.
Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and excessive porosity –
Remove defective portion of base and weld metal down to sound
metal and deposit additional weld metal.
Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity – Clean and
deposit additional weld metal.
Overlapping and lack of fusion – Remove and replace the
defective length of weld.
Slag inclusion – Remove those parts of the weld containing slag
and fill with weld metal.
Removal of adjacent base metal during welding – Clean and form
full size by depositing additional weld metal.
Where corrections require the depositing of additional weld metal,

the electrode used shall be smaller than the electrode used in
making the original weld.
A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unless by the

use of acid etching, magnetic inspection or other equally positive
means, the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited, in
which case sound metal 50 mm or more beyond each end of the
crack need not be removed.
In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging, chipping or

grinding shall not extend into the base metal any substantial amount
beyond the depth of the web penetration unless cracks or other
defects exist in the base metal.
Where the work performed subsequent to the making of a deficient

weld has rendered the weld inaccessible or has caused new
conditions which would make the correction of the deficiency
dangerous or ineffectual, the original condition shall be restored by
renewal of welds or members, or both before making the necessary
corrections, or else the deficiency shall be compensated by
additional work according to a revised design approved by the
Engineer.
Caulking of welds shall not be done.
Before adding weld metal or rewelding, the surfaces shall be

cleaned thoroughly. Where incomplete fusion is disclosed by
chipping, grinding or gas gouging, to correct defects, that part of the
weld shall be removed and rewelded.
409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving
Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer welds may be used only

if authorized and ordered by the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to prevent
overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, flecking or excessive cold
working of weld and base metal.
409.3.2.11 Cleaning and Protective Coatings
Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and shall
be in accordance with the Specification. The surface to be painted shall be
cleaned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from all
welds.
Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particle of
slag.
409.3.2.12 Identification
The operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or paint,
near the welds made by him.
409.3.2.13 Inspection
On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by an

Inspector appointed by the Engineer.
The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauges.
The inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark all welds that he has
inspected and accepted.
The Contractor shall remove and replace, or correct as instructed, all

welds found defective or deficient. He shall also replace all methods found to
produce inferior results, with methods which will produce satisfactory work.
In the event that fault welding or the removal for rewelding of faulty
welding shall damage the base metal, the Contractor shall remove and
replace the damaged material.
409.4 Measurement and Payment
Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural

steel structures shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost
thereof shall be considered as included in the contract price for other items.
ITEM 410 – TREATED AND UNTREATED
TIMBER 410.1 Description
This Item shall consist of structural timber of the specie and size called
for on the Plans, either treated or untreated as called for in the Proposal. It
shall include the furnishing of the timber, the framing, erecting, furnishing of
hardware and the furnishing of paint and paintings if paint is called for on the
Plans or in the Special Provisions.

410.2.1 Timber
Timber shall be the specie specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise

noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be
used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worm holes decay, warp, ring
separation, or any defect which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its
intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated
timber and if that specie is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and
durability may be used if authorized by the Engineer. If the timber is to be
treated, only those species shall be used which are known to possess
properties which make them favorable to treatment.
410.2.2 Paint
When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the

requirements of Item 411, Paint.
410.2.3 Hardware
Hardware shall conform to the requirements of Item 402, Timber

Structures.
410.2.4 Preservatives
The preservatives shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend

as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to
the Standard Specifications for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products,
ASTM D-1760.
When timber is intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum oil
blend shall not be used.
410.3.1 Timber Treatment

Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosote
petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure
process. The process shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 133,
preservatives and pressure treatment process for timber, but with such
changes in temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other factors
affecting the final treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the
treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The
treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce
excessive checking.
The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the

timber shall be 20 mm. The minimum retention of the preservative per cubic
metre of timber shall be as follows:
For general use, 192 kg by empty cell process

For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process
The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the date

that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber,
the treatment process, and the finished treatment timber may all be inspected.
The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine
conformance with those Specifications and suitability of conditions for
treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that
temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of treatment materials used
may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote petroleum oil mixture
shall be furnished as required for tests.
After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to

determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking quantity of free
preservative remaining on the timber and will check any other visual evidence
that the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The
penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of
well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes
shall be plugged with plugs approximately 1.6 mm larger in diameter that the
bit used in boring the holes.
If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the

entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Inspector to be
unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment the penetration is still
insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected.
Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause
for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs.
The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and

pressure gauges so that the process can be accurately controlled and a
continuous record made of all stages of the treating process. If required by the
Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum and
minimum temperatures and pressures used during all stages of the process.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of timber
complete in place and accepted. Measurement of timber shall be computed
from
the nominal dimension of the timber even though the actual dimensions may
be scant. The measurement of timber shall include only such timber as a part
of the completed and accepted work and will not include any timber required
for a falsework, bracing or other timber required in the erection.
The quantities, determined as provided in Section 410.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for
Timber or Untreated Timber as called for in the Proposal, which price and
payment shall constitute full compensate for furnishing all timber, for
preservative treating when required, and for the delivery, framing, erecting,
painting if required, and for the furnishing of all labor, hardware, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

410 (1) Timber Cubic Meter
410 (2) Treated Timber Cubic Meter
ITEM 411 – PAINT
411.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying all paint materials
including vehicles, pigments, pastes, driers, thinners and mixed paints for
steel and wooden structures; sampling testing and packing; preparation of the
surface and application of paint to structures.
411.2.1 General
Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required

fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a
suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and
drier as required.
Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum powder or paste of the

required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified
amount of vehicle.
The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder form.
All paints shall meet the following general requirements:
The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily

redisperse with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. The paint
shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall
be free from lumps and skins.
The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling

properties and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a
smooth vertical surface.
The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish, free from roughness
grit, unevenness and other imperfections.
The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a ¾ filled tightly closed
container.
411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications
indicated as follows:
Ready Mixed Red Lead AASHTO M 72 and PNS

Paint Type I, II, III & IV
Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 and PNS
Type I & II
White & Tinted Ready
Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage Green Bridge
Paint AASHTO M 67
Black Paint for Bridges
And Timber Structures AASHTO M 68
Basic Lead-Silico-Chromate
Ready Mixed Primer AASHTO M 229
Ready Mixed Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 260 and PNS
411.2.3 Drier
This Specification covers both straight oil drier (material free from resins
and gums), and Japan drier (material containing varnish gums). The drier shall
be composed of lead manganese or cobalt or a mixture of any of these
elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins or gums,
and mineral spirits or turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall
conform to the following requirements:
Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter.
Flash Point – (Tag Close Up) Not less than 30oC.
Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at
100oC shall have an elastic film.
Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1
volume of drier to 19 volume of oil without curdling and the resulting
mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours.
Color – When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1
volume of drier to 8 volume of oil, the resulting mixture shall be
darker than a solution of 6 grams of Potassium Dichromate in 13 cc
of pure Sulfuric Acid (sp.gr. 1.84).
411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing
It is the intent of this Specification to provide a paint of proper brushing

consistency, which will not run, steak or sag and which will have satisfactory
drying qualities.
411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats On Structural Steel
The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 240 grams of aluminum

powder or paste per liter of vehicle of long oil spar varnish. This makes a paint
containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of
powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the
measured volume of vehicle poured over it. The paste or powder shall be
incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or
paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the
container, the paint shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and
the paint shall be suitably stirred during use. The paint shall be mixed on the
job and only enough for one day’s use shall be mixed at one time.
When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall
be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 24
grams/liter of paint. The exact quantity used shall be sufficient to give a
contrast in color which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of
aluminum paint are specified, the second coat shall be tinted.
411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber
The paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural
Steel except that the proportions shall be 270 grams of aluminum powder or
paste to one litre of vehicle.
Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the
Special Provisions.
411.3.4 Containers and Markings
All paints shall be shipped to strong substantial containers plainly

marked with the weight, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a true
statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions of the
pigment to
vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers, and the stencil of the
authorized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will
not be accepted for use.
Method of sampling shall be as follows:
One 20-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be

obtained for 100 cans of the delivered material or 10% fraction
thereof.
One 4-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be

obtained for every 100 cans or fraction thereof of the delivered
material.
Methods of testing will be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or

ASTM Methods.
411.3.6 Painting
411.3.6.1
The painting of structure shall include the proper preparation of the
surface; the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the
protection of the pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath the
structures, the protection of all parts of the structure (both superstructure and
substructure) against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of
paint or of paint materials; and the supplying of all tools, tackle, scaffolding
labor, paint and materials necessary for the entire work.
Paint shall not be applied during rain, storms or when the air is misty, or
when, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are otherwise unsatisfactory
for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp surfaces or upon metal
which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a
pervious paint film.
No wide flat brush shall be used. All brushes preferably shall be either
round or oval but if flat brushes are used, they shall not exceed 100 mm in
width.
The paint when applied shall be so manipulated as to produce a uniform

even coating in close contact with the surface being painted, and shall be
worked into all corners and crevices.
On surfaces inaccessible to brushes, the paint shall be applied by spray

gun or with sheepskin daubers specially constructed for the purposes.
Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, preferably by means of mechanical

mixers, before being removed from the containers, and, to keep the pigments
in suspension, shall be kept stirred while being applied.
When a paint gun is used, the equipment used shall be of an approved

type and shall have provision for agitation of paint in the spray container. In
the case of aluminum paint, the pressure used shall be only that necessary to
secure adequate atomization. If in the opinion of the Engineer unsatisfactory
results are obtained from the use of a spray gun, its use shall be discontinued
and the painting completed by the use of brushes.
411.3.6.2 Painting Structural Steel
Surfaces of metals to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust,

loose mill, scale, dirt, oil or grease, and other foreign substances. Unless
cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld areas, before cleaning is
begun, shall be neutralized with a proper chemical, after which they shall be
thoroughly rinsed with water. Cleaning may be by any of the following three
methods:
1. Hand Cleaning
The removal of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of
metal brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers or other effective means.
Oil and grease shall be removed by the use of gasoline or benzene.
Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be used for removing loose dust.
2. Sandblasting
Sandblasting shall remove all scale and other substances down

to the base metal. Special attention shall be given to the cleaning of
corners and re- entrant angels. Before painting, sand adhering to the
steel in corners and elsewhere shall be removed. The cleaning shall
be approved by the Engineer prior to any painting. The material shall
be painted before the rust forms and not later than 2 hours after
cleaning.
3. Flame Cleaning
Oil and grease shall be removed by washing with suitable

solvent. Excess solvent shall be wiped from the work before
proceeding with subsequent operation. The surface to be painted
shall be cleaned and dehydrated (freed of occluded moisture) by the
passage of oxyacetylene flames which have an oxygen to acetylene
of at least one. The inner cones of these flames shall have a ratio
length to port diameter of at least 8 and shall not be more than 4 mm
center to center. The oxyacetylene flames shall be traversed over
the surface of the steel in such manner and at such speed that the
surface is dehydrated, and dirt, rust, loose scale, scale in the form of
blisters or scabs, and similar foreign matter are freed by the rapid
intense heating by the flames. The flames shall not be traversed so
slowly that loose scale or other foreign matter is fused to the surface
of the steel. The number, arrangement and manipulation of the
flames shall be such that all parts of the surface are adequately
cleaned and dehydrated. Promptly after the application of the flames,
the surface of the steel shall be wire-brushed, hand scraped
wherever necessary and then swept and dusted to remove all
free materials and foreign particles. Compressed air shall not be
used for this operation. Paint shall be applied promptly after the steel
has been cleaned and while the temperature of the steel is still
above that of the surrounding atmosphere, so that there will be no
recondensation of moisture on the cleaned surfaces.
4. Shop Painting of Structural Steel
When all fabrication work is completed and has been tentatively

accepted, all surfaces not painted before assembling shall be given
two coats of Red Lead Shop Paint conforming to the requirements of
this Specification. (The inside of top chords for trusses and laced
members or inaccessible parts, except contact surfaces, may be
painted before assembling). Shipping pieces shall not be located for
shipment until thoroughly dry. No painting shall be done after loading
the materials on transport vehicles.
Erection marks for field identifications of members shall be

painted upon previously painted surfaces.
With the exception of abutting joints and base plates, machine-

finished surface shall be coated, as soon as practicable after
acceptance with a hot mixture of white lead and tallow before
removal from the shop. The composition used for coating machine-
finished surface shall be mixed in the following proportions:
Pure Tallow 1,915 grams

Pure White Lead 958 grams
Pure Linseed Oil 1.0 liter
5. Field Painting of Structural Steel
When the erection work is complete including riveting and

straightening of bent metal; all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease or
other foreign material shall be removed as specified under cleaning
of surfaces.
As soon as the Engineer has examined and approved all field

rivets, the heads of such rivets and field bolts, all welds and any
surfaces from which the shop coat of paint has become worn off or
has otherwise become defective, shall be cleaned and thoroughly
covered with one coat of shop coat paint.
When the paint applied for “touching up” rivet heads and
abraded surfaces has become thoroughly dry, such field coats as
called for shall be applied. In no case shall a succeeding coat be
applied until the previous coat has dried throughout the full thickness of
the film. All small cracks and cavities which were not sealed in water-
tight manner by the first field coat shall be filled with a pasty mixture of
red lead and linseed oil before the second field coat is applied.
The following provisions shall apply to the application of all field

coats. To secure a maximum coating on edges of plates or shapes,
rivet heads and other parts subjected to special wear and attack,
these parts shall first be stripped, followed immediately by the
general painting of the whole surface, including the edges and rivet
heads.
The application of the final coats shall be deferred until adjoining

concrete work has been placed and finished. If concreting operations
have damaged that paint, the surface shall be recleaned and
repainted.
411.3.6.3 Painting and Timber Structures
Timber structures shown on the Plans to be painted, shall be given two

coats of the specified materials, which shall be thoroughly brushed in.
Additional coats shall be required when so specified on the Plans. All surfaces
shall be thoroughly dry before painting, and each coat shall be allowed to
stand for three or four days, or until thoroughly dry before applying the
succeeding coat.
Timber which required painting must be seasoned timber surfaced on 4

sides. It shall be either untreated or salt-treated timber as specified on the
Plans.
The entire surface of all untreated timber that is to be painted, shall be

given a priming coat immediately after the material is delivered to the project.
All contact surfaces shall receive the second coat paint.
Special care shall be taken during construction and handling so that the
pieces to be painted do not come in contact, except when required, with the
creosoted materials and that no oil is brushed on the same during construction
operations. The Contractor shall be required to pile such pieces separately
from the creosoted materials and keep them from contact with same until
ready for erection.
Creosoted materials such as guardrails and guide posts which are to be

painted, shall be painted with aluminum paint as specified above.
411.3.6.4 Painting Galvanized Surface
For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized surfaces to be

painted, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible in order that the
surface may weather.
Before painting galvanized surfaces they shall be treated as follows:
In 4 litres of soft water, dissolve 60 ml of copper chloride, copper

nitrate, and sal ammonia, then add 60 ml of commercial muriatic acid.
This should be done in earthenware or glass vessel, never in tin or
other metal receptacle. Apply the solution with a wide flat brush to the
galvanized surface, when it will assume a dark almost black color
which on drying becomes a grayish film.
2. The surfaces, when dry, may then be painted as described.
411.3.6.5 Repainting Existing Structures
When called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, existing

structures shall be given the number and kind of coats of field paint as
stipulated. The surface to be repainted shall be cleaned as specified under
Subsection 411.3.6.2, Painting Structural Steel, with the added provisions that
all dead or loose paint shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing as
may be necessary. Timber railings, name plates, planking and other interfering
parts shall be removed before cleaning is begun and shall be replaced after
the painting has been completed and the last coat has thoroughly dried. The
application of the coat shall be as specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, (5),
Field Painting of Structural Steel.
411.4 Measurement and Payment
Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the
cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of
the items where called for.
PART G – DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES
ITEM 500 – PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS\
500.1 Description
This item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe culverts
and storm drains, hereinafter referred to as “conduit” in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following

specifications:
Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel

culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36
Cast iron culvert pipe AASHTO M 64
Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe AASHTO M 86
Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe AASHTO M 170
Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert pipe

and pipe arches AASHTO M 190
Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain

and sewer pipe AASHTO M 206
Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm drain

and sewer pipe AASHTO M 207
Asbestos cement pipe for culverts and storm drains AASHTO M 217
Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by
volume of Portland Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as
necessary to obtain the required consistency.
Portland Cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its preparation.
Rubber gaskets AASHTO M 198
Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp
(Cannavis Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a combination of these fibers.
The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps,
dirt and extraneous matter.
Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173
Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.2,

Bedding.
Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6,

Backfilling.
When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be

inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and
material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with
materials quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of
manufacturing lots as to quality.
Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials

will be subjected to the latest inspection and approval of the Engineer.
500.3.1 Trenches Excavation
Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item

103, Structure Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the
conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and
around the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical.
The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width.
Where required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal
camber of the magnitude specified.
When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed in

embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been completed to the
specified or directed height above the designed grade of the conduit.
500.3.2 Bedding
The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When no

bedding class is specified, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply.
Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan
details.
Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less
than 30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum
thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm. The bedding
material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve
and not more than 10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of the
bedding material shall be shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its
total height. Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the
bell when bell and spigot type conduit is used.
Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less
than 10 percent of its total height. The foundation surface, completed in
accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be shaped to fit the conduit
and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bells, if any.
For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding
blanket of sand or fine granular material as specified above shall be provided as
follows:
Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth

10 mm 25 mm
25 mm 50 mm
50 mm 75 mm
For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not exceed
the width of bottom plate.
500.3.3 Laying Conduit
The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line.
The lower segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped bedding
throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and outside
circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream. Flexible
conduit shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides.
Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal

center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and
elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis within 5 degrees
of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the conduit.
500.3.4 Jointing Conduit
Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove design
unless another type is specified. The method of joining conduit sections shall be
such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush
and even.
Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland Cement
grout, (c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e) oakum and joint compound,
(f) plastic sealing compound, or by a combination of these types, or any other
type, as may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to
form a continuous bead around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on
the inside. For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured
grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so as to form a flexible water-tight
seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this material and then
sealed with the specified material.
When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall be
protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material.
Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands.
Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to
be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and relaid or
replaced.
500.3.5 Field Strutting
When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit shall
be increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied after the
entire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but before backfilling. The
vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and struts or by horizontal
ties shall be used on paved invert pipe.
Ties and struts shall be 300 mm in place until the embankment is

completed and compacted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of relaid

conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be cleaned of all
foreign materials prior to reinstallation.
500.3.6 Backfilling
Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width and to an
elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall be fine, readily compactible soil or
granular material selected from excavation or from a source of the Contractor’s choice,
and shall not contain stones that would be retained on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of highly
plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill material shall have not less
than 95 percent passing a 12.5 mm sieve and not less than 95 percent retained on a
4.75 mm sieve. Oversized material, if present, shall be removed at the source of the
material, except as directed by the Engineer.
When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench,
backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and
compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides to an
elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to
thoroughly compact the backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill
shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for the full required length.
Except where negative projecting embankment-type installation is specified, the
backfill material shall be placed and compacted for the full depth of the trench.
When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill shall be
placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not
exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
the conduit for its full length to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit.
The width of the backfill on each side of the conduit for the portion above the top
of the trench shall be equal to twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m,
whichever is less. The backfill material used in the trench section and the portion
above the top of the trench for a distance on each side of the conduit equal to the
horizontal inside diameter and to 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall
conform to the requirements for backfill materials in this Subsection. The
remainder of the backfill shall consist of materials from excavation and borrow that
is suitable for embankment construction.
Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment, shall be

achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling.
All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this Subsection
shall be protected by one metre cover of fill before heavy equipment is permitted
to cross during construction of the roadway.
500.3.7 Imperfect Trench
Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed
as described in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the conduit
equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A trench equal
in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the length shown
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300
of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical as possible. The
trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil. Construction of
embankment above shall then proceed in a normal manner.

Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and relaid, will be measured by the
linear metre in place. Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will be measured along the
invert.
Each section will be measured by the number of units installed.
Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length measurement

for conduit, or they may be measured by the number of units installed.
Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the

cubic metre in place.
When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing and
Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be the
number of cubic metre complete in place and accepted, measured in final position
between limits as follows:
Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to the

top of the original ground line but will not include any material
placed outside of vertical planes 450 mm up outside of and
parallel to the inside wall of pipe at its widest horizontal
dimension.
When the original ground line is less than 300 mm above the top
of the pipe, the measurement will also include the placing of all
backfill materials, above the original ground line adjacent to the
pipe for a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe and for a
distance on each side of the pipe not greater than the widest
horizontal dimension of the pipe.
The measurement shall include the placing of backfill material in

all trenches of the imperfect trench method. Materials re-
excavated for imperfect trench construction will be measured for
payment under Item 103, Structure Excavation.
The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provided in Section

500.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
linear meter for the conduit of the types and sizes specified complete in place. End
sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price per piece for the kind and size specified complete in
place.
Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including excavation below flow
line grade and for imperfect trench, shall be measured and paid for as provided in
Item 103, Structure Excavation.
Concrete for Class A bedding will be paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete.
When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for
“Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” payment for placing backfill
material around pipe culverts will be considered as included in the payment for
excavation of the backfill material.
Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
500 (1) Pipe Culverts, - mm Linear Meter

Class -
500 (2) Storm Drain, - mm Linear Meter

Class -
ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS
501.1 Description
This item shall consist of constructing underdrains, using pipe and granular
filter materials, underdrain pipe outlets, and blind drains using granular material in
accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the
lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following

specifications:
Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel

Culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36
Extra strength and standard strength clay pipe

and perforated clay pipe AASHTO M 65
Perforated concrete pipe AASHTO M 175
Porous concrete pipe AASHTO M 176
Bituminized-fiber non-pressure sewer drain and

underdrainage pipe systems AASHTO M 177
Asbestos-cement perforated underdrain pipe AASHTO M 189
Granular Backfill Filter Material – Granular backfill filter material shall be

permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that
soundness tests will not be required and minor variation in grading and content of
deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer.
When the location of manufacturing plants allows, the plants will be

inspected periodically by compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and
material sample will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material
quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots
as to quality.
All material shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition
at the latest practicable time.
501.3.1 Pipe Installation
Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required by the

Plans or as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 150 mm bedding layer of
granular backfill material shall be placed and compacted at the bottom of the
trench for its full width and length.
Subdrainage pipe of the type and size specified shall be embedded firmly in
the bedding material.
Perforated pipe shall normally, be placed with the perforations down and
the pipe sections shall be joined securely with the appropriate coupling fittings or
bands.
Non-perforated pipe shall be laid with the bell end upgrade and with open
joints wrapped with suitable material to permit entry of water, or unwrapped as
may be specified. Upgrade end sections of all subdrainage pipe installations shall
be closed with suitable plugs to prevent entry of soil materials.
After the pipe installation has been inspected and approved, granular backfill material
shall be placed to a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe. Care shall be taken not to
displace the pipe or the covering at open joints. The remainder of the granular backfill
material shall then be placed and compacted in 150 mm maximum layers to the required
height. Any remaining portion of trench above the granular backfill shall be filled with
either granular or impervious material, as may be specified, and thoroughly compacted.
501.3.2 Underdrain Outlets
Trenches for underdrain outlets shall be excavated to the width and depth
shown on the Plans or as otherwise directed. Pipes shall be laid in the trench with
all ends firmly joined by the applicable methods and means. After inspection and
approval of the pipe installation, the trench shall be backfilled in accordance with
501.3.3 Blind Drain
Trenches for blind drains shall be excavated to the width and depth shown
on the Plans. The trench shall be filled with granular backfill material to the depth
required by the Plans. Any remaining upper portion of trench shall be filled with
either granular or impervious material in accordance with Item 103, Structure
Excavation.
Underdrains and outlets shall be measured by the linear meter for pipe of
the type and size specified. Blind drains shall be measured by the linear meter
including all excavation and backfill materials required.
Granular backfill filter material, when specified in the Contract as a pay item
shall be measured in place by the cubic meter, completed and accepted. Cross-
sectional measurements will not exceed the net dimensions shown on the Plans
or as directed by the Engineer.
Excavation for underdrain pipe will be measured and paid for as provided in
The accepted quantities determined as provided in Section 501.4, Method

of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices.
Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
501 (1) Underdrain - mm Linear Meter

501 (2) Blind drain Linear Meter
501 (3) Granular Backfill

filter material for underdrains Cubic Meter
ITEM 502 – MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS
502.1 Description
This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of

manholes, inlets and catch basins in accordance with this Specification and in
reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Other materials shall meet the following specifications:
Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dimensions and
the metal to AASHTO M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall conform to
ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for Metal.
Sewer and manhole brick

(Made from clay or shale) AASHTO M 91
Building brick (Solid masonry units made

from clay or shale) AASHTO M 114
Joint Mortar- Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar shall be
composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to
which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the
cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item
405, Structural Concrete.
Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall conform to
the plan dimensions and to the following specification requirements for the
designated materials.
Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them
evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same
pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed.
Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A frame and
a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair.
All castings shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion meeting

the requirements of ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective
Coating for Metal.
Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of the units
and shall be separate casting poured from the same material as the casting they
represent.
Gray iron casting AASHTO M 105
Mild to medium-strength carbon steel castings

for general application AASHTO M 103
Structural steel AASHTO M 183
Galvanizing, where specified for these units,

shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 111
Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 31
Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial

permanent steel forms. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28- day
compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be cured
in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores taken
from such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall be
provided as necessary to provide for handling of the pre-cast units.
A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each
unit permit compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3
cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units
shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is not met
at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be rejected.
Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000 square

millimeters, excessive water absorption and failure to meet strength requirements
shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-cast reinforced concrete manhole risers and
tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 199.
The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified

manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory
testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be the basis
for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality.
All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition

at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the opportunity to check for
compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the work.
Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405,

Structural Concrete.
Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed
on the inside of the structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for proper
connection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly around the
pipe.
When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames,

covers and gratings shall be removed and the walls reconstructed as required.
The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion,
each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign
matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final
acceptance of the work.
Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103,

Structure Excavation.
Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed
as applicable, will be measured by the unit. Any additional concrete, reinforcing
steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heights of structures paid of
under this Item and in excess of the standard height shown on the Plans will be
measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404,
Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures noted on the Plans as “junction boxes”
will be measured for payment as manholes.
The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and
pairs of metal frames and covers will be measured as acceptably completed.
The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as

directed will be measured as acceptably completed.
The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, Method

of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the
contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the Item.
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103,
Structure Excavation.
502 (1) Manholes Each
502 (2) Inlets, type Each

502 (3) Catch basins Each
502 (4) Concrete covers Each
502 (5) Metal frames and gratings, type Pair
502 (6) Metal frames and covers Pair
502 (7) Adjusting manholes Each
502 (8) Adjusting inlets Each
502 (9) Adjusting catch basin Each
ITEM 503 – DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME
503.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, and equipment
including labor required in undertaking the proper application of steel grating with
frame as shown on the plans and in accordance with this specification.
503.2 Classes and Uses of Road Grates and Frames
Classes of grates that are commonly use in drainage work are sump,
trench and box.
Sump grates shall be used to create a trafficable ground level entry area for
surface rainwater to flow into the underground stormwater drainage system. Sump
grates shall be used in paved or grassed areas that are graded to direct the
surface water to a single pit or to a series of pits. Sump grates shall be plain or
hinged.
Trench grates shall be used to collect surface rainwater run off from areas
that cannot be graded to direct flow into a single pit.
Box grates or road drainage shall be used to transfer road surface storm
water into an underground drainage system. Normally used in conjunction with
kerb entry, the addition of the grate significantly increases the hydraulic capacity
of the inlet, particularly on steep slopes.
503.3 Strength Classifications and the Loading Conditions for Sump, Trench
and Box grates
Class A – Test Load 10kN
For locations trafficked only by pedestrians, wheelchairs and cyclists –

inaccessible to motor vehicles by virtue of barriers, narrow passages or
stepped or unpaved approaches.
Class B – Test Load 80kN
For locations normally trafficked by pedestrians and slow moving

passenger cars or light agricultural tractors. These locations include areas
accessible to infrequent slow moving heavy trucks. Typical locations
include footpaths, ground level and multistoried car parks, suburban
driveways and back yards.
Class C – Test Load 150kN
For locations trafficked by slow moving fully laden trucks such as

pedestrians, malls and industrial or commercial areas.
Class D – Test Load 210kN
For locations trafficked by fast moving fully laden trucks and forklifts with
wheel loads to 5.0T. This includes all public roads from residential to
freeway.
Class E, F or G – Test Load 400kN, 600kN or 900kN

For locations subject to vehicles such as large forklifts, earthmoving or
container handling equipment and aircraft. Typical locations include
wharves, container storage areas, heavy industry or construction sites and
domestic or international airports.
All loading conditions specified above are applicable to the three classes of grates
depending on their specific uses and locations.
503.4 Materials Requirement
503.4.1 Steel Grating
The steel grating shall be made of fabricated mild steel provided with hot
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/AASHTO M 232 for superior
corrosion protection. Steel grating shall be machine-made grating comprised of
steel flat bars standing on edge equispaced from each other. To prevent them
from falling over and to provide restraint in buckling, a twisted cross rod (6mm) is
forge-welded1 into the top of the flat bars.
503.4.2 Steel Frame
The steel frame clear openings of drainage grates shall be 15mm larger
than nominal sizes of industry standard sized pits. These pits increase in size in
increments of 150mm. This shall be done to allow frames to be placed over
standard panel formwork and cast in while pouring the pit walls, to speeds up
installation and ensure the frame is fully embedded in the concrete.
503.4.3 Drainage Grate Sizes
The drainage grates shall be identified by their internal clear opening

dimensions of the frame. For square and rectangular grates, the normal
convention shall be the width x length. Metal units shall conform to the approved
plan dimensions and specifications requirement for the designated materials.
Grates shall consist of 25mm to 65mm x 3mm, 4.5mm or 5mm thick flat
bars with length of not more than 6.1m spaced at 30mm o.c. with 6mm twisted rod
spaced at 100mm o.c.. Angular frame (L 75mm x 75mm x 9mm thick) shall be
coated with hot dipped galvanized for superior corrosion protection finish and
extended life. If required, I-Beam support shall be provided in the grates in
accordance with the approved plan. It shall also conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 153 or its equivalents AASHTO M 232.
503.4.4 The metal unit shall conform to ASTM A 36 / AASHTO M 183.
Dimension
Tolerances: Thickness = ± 0.20mm
Width = ± 0.80mm
Length = + 50mm/NIL mm
Straightness = 6mm in each 1.5m length
Forge-welding is a process of metal fusion using a combination of high temperature

and high pressure.
503.4.5 Joint Mortar
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joint mortar shall be composed of

one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which
hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by
weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural
Concrete. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi).
Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405,

Structural Concrete.
Metal gratings which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. They
shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be
reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of bearings
shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. The steel grating and its
corresponding frame shall constitute one pair.
When grade adjustment or existing drainage grates is specified, the frames

and steel gratings shall be removed and the walls shall be reconstructed as
required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon
completion, each drainage grates shall be cleaned of any accumulations of silt,
debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation
until final acceptance of the work.
Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 102,

Excavation.
503.6 Acceptance Requirement
A sufficient number of cylinders for concrete construction shall be cast from

the concrete for each unit for compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow
for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14
days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the
strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be
rejected.
The steel grating plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with
specified manufacturing and fabricating methods and bars samples will be
obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements.
All draining grates materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to

condition at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the opportunity to check
for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the work.
The quantity to be measured and paid for will be the number of pairs of
metal frames and gratings completed and accepted. Concrete and reinforcing
steel (AASHTO M 31) will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural
Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, respectively.
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item
102, Excavation.
The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 503.7, Method

of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the
contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit Of Measurement
503 Metal frames and grating Set
ITEM 509 – SHEET PILES
509.1 Description
This shall consist of furnishing, driving and cutting off of sheet piling
covered by this Specification.
509.2.1 Timber Sheet Piles

The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted on the Plans or in the Special
Provisions, may consist of any species which will satisfactorily stand driving. It
shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free from worm holes,
loose knots, wing shakes, decay or unsound portions or other defects which might
impair its strength or tightness.
509.2.2 Concrete Sheet Piles

Concrete, reinforcement, and manufacture of concrete sheet piles shall
conform to the requirements of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.3, Concrete
Piles.
509.2.3 Steel Sheet Piles
Steel sheet piles shall be of the type, weight and Section Modulus
indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, and shall conform to the requirement
of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.7, Sheet Piles, Painting shall conform to the
requirements for Item 411, Paint, Subsection 411.6.2, Painting Structural Steel.
Sheet piles shall be driven to elevation shown on the Plans or as directed

by the Engineer. Where impractical to drive to plan elevation due to subsurface
conditions, the driving of piles may be stopped at a higher elevation with the
written permission of the Engineer. However, before granting such permission, the
Engineer shall ascertain that the Contractor has adequate equipment for the
required driving and that the piles can be driven to the plan elevation with the
proper use of this equipment.
The top of the piling shall be driven or cut-off to a straight line at the
elevation indicated on the Plans.
The requirements governing the installation of sheet piling shall conform in

general to those governing bearing piles as set forth under Item 400, Piling.
Sheet piling will be measured by the linear meter of sheet piling as shown
on the Plans or as directed in writing by the Engineer, complete in place and
accepted. However, measurement of piling which has been delivered to plan
length and cannot be driven according to plan or directed elevation because of
subsurface condition shall be measured as if driven to that elevations.
Payment of steel piles as determined in Section 509.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be made at the contract unit price per linear meter. Such
payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
equipment, tools, paint, bolts, wales and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.
509 (a) Sheet Piles (Timber) Linear Meter
509 (b) Sheet Piles (Steel) Linear Meter
509 (c) Sheet Piles (Concrete) Linear Meter
ITEM 510 – CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION
510.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of concrete slope
protection including all necessary excavation, a bed course and reinforced
concrete to the required thickness and extent to protect slopes against erosion.
Construction details shall be as shown on the Plans.

510.2.1 Bed Course
A bed course, where required, shall be granular material which satisfies the
requirements for Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A.
510.2.2 Formwork
Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, Concrete

Structures.
510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.
510.2.4 Concrete
Concrete shall be Class B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete,

unless otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.
510.3.1 Excavation
The ground shall be excavated where necessary in accordance with the

dimensions, lines and grades shown on the Plans.
510.3.2 Bed Course
Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and as specified in Item 200,
Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percent of the maximum dry
density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
510.3.3 Concrete
The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the
positions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise
specified, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have
between slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer.
The toe of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and protected
a shown on the Plans.
510.3.4 Drainage
Drainage of the bed course or backfill shall be provided as shown on the

Plans or as required by the Engineer.
The quantity of granular material in the bed course to be paid for shall be
measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.
The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic

meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.
The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price according to the Pay Item
in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
the necessary excavation, for all labor, equipment, tools, all materials including
formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

510 (1) Bed Course Cubic meter in-place

Granular Material
510 (2) Concrete Cubic meter in-place
ITEM 511 – GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
511.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and
placing rocks installed at the locations designated, in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and
arrangements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
511.2.1 General
Gabions shall be constructed of wire mesh and shall be supplied in various

lengths and heights. A double twisted wire mesh container of variable sizes,
uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar units, and
filled with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable, monolithic
structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings, revetments and
weirs for erosion control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3 or 4 times the width
of the gabion and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as shown on the plans. The
horizontal width shall not be less than one meter. Gabion furnished shall be of
uniform width.
The width, height and length of the gabion as manufactured shall not differ
more than 5% from the ordered size prior to filling.
Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned
into internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions, having
smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are generally
used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be 3. 00 m to
6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23 m or 0.30 m
or as shown on the Plans.
The width and length of the revet mattress as manufactured shall not differ
more than 5%, and the height shall not differ more than 10% from the ordered size
prior to filling.
511.2.2 Wire
The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in

gabions and mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as
appropriate for the style ordered.
511.2.2.1 Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from zinc-coated

steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3 coating,
soft temper.
511.2.2.2 Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from Zn-5A1-MM-

coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A 856 M,
Class 3 coating, soft temper.
511.2.2.3 Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same type
of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC coating
extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC coating shall
conform to the following requirements:
Test Method
1. Specific Gravity 1.30 to 1.35 D 792

2. Tensile Strength, min 20.6 MPa D 412
3. Modulus of Elasticity, min 18.6 MPa D 412
4. Hardness, shore “D” between 50 & D 2240
60
5. Brittleness Temp, max 90C (150F) or D 746
lower temp.
6. Resistance to Abrasion, % 12% D 1242
weight loss, max.
The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted
in the fabrication of the mesh.
511.2.2.4 Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from aluminum-

coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, soft temper.
511.2.3 Lacing Wire and Stiffener
Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same
coating material as the double-twisted wire mesh conforming to
Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A 856 M or A 809 with a tensile
strength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7.
511.2.4 Fasteners made from zinc-coated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum

mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel shall
conform to specification A 764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table 3.
511.2.5 Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components

mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of
the mattresses lid which is produced separately from the base. All
gabions and mattresses shall be supplied in the collapsed form, either
folded and bundled or rolled, for shipping.
511.2.6 Dimensions
The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in the
fabrication of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows:
Diameter, mm
Gabion Mattresses
Metallic PVC Metallic PVC
Coated Coated Coated Coated
Body Wire 3.05 2.70 2.20 2.20
Selvedge or Perimeter Wire 3.80 3.40 2.70 2.70
Tying and Connecting Wire 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20
Diameter Tolerances for Galvanized Wire to be used in the

fabrication of gabion and mattress shall be .10.
The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be

0.50 mm and 0.38 mm, respectively.
511.2.7 Mechanical Properties
Tensile Strength – The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the

fabrication of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test
Methods ASTM A 370, shall be as follows:
Strength, max, Mpa

Gabion Mattresses
Body Wire 485 515
Selvedge or Perimeter Wire 485 485
Tying and Connecting Wire 515 515
511.2.8 Weight of Coating
The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall be
in accordance with ASTM A 975 or as follows:
Wire Diameter, mm Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2, ASTM A 641

Over 1.90 to 2.30 220
Over 2.30 to 2.70 230
Over 2.70 to 3.10 240
Over 3.10 to 3.50 260
Over 3.50 to 3.90 270
511.2. 9 Rock Fill
Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable
rock pieces that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to
severe weather conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in
sizes ranging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum
3
density of 1,400 kg/m . Voids shall be evenly distributed.
No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the mattress depth and at least 85% by
weight of the stone shall have a size greater than 80 mm. No stones shall be able
to pass through the mesh.
The rock shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 63 except that the
sodium sulphate soundness loss shall not exceed 9% after 5 cycles.
511.2.10 Filter Fabric
Filter cloth shall consist of 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene.
511.3.1 Fabrication
Gabions and mattresses shall be in the form of rectangular baskets of

the required dimensions and shall be manufactured from wire as
specified in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be made of steel wire
double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x 10 having a
nominal mesh openings of 83 by 114 mm. Mattresses shall be made of
steel wire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 6 x 8
having a nominal mesh openings of 64 by 83 mm. Tolerances on the
hexagonal, double-twisted wire mesh opening shall not exceed 10%
on the nominal dimension D values, 64 mm for mattresses and 83 mm
for gabions. The edges shall be formed into a securely connected
selvedge adequate to prevent raveling.
Individual basket ties and connections shall be made by using a
quantity of wire not less than 8% of the weight of each basket.
When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely tied
diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of equal
length and width.
Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lids
and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single
unit construction, base, lids, ends and sides shall be either woven into
a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base
section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility
at the point of connection is at least equal to that of the mesh.
The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not more

than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the body of
the gabions, into cells the length of which does not exceed the
horizontal width. The gabion shall be furnished with the necessary
diaphragms secured in proper position on the base in such a manner
that no additional tying at this junction will be necessary.
Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a

height of one half the width or less, and eight cross-connecting wires
shall be provided in each cell having a height greater than one half the
width.
All perimeter edge of the mesh forming the gabion shall be securely
selvedged so that the joints, by tying the selvedges, have at least the
same strength as the body of the mesh.
Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall not be
less than 3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same specifications as
the wire mesh.
511.3.2 Assembly and Construction:
Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. The gabions shall

be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and grade shall be
Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all vertical
edges with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches) spacing or
by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical
edges with a coil every 102 mm ( 4 inches). Empty gabion units shall
be set to line and grade as shown on the Plans or as described by the
Engineer. Wire ties or connecting wires shall be used to join the units
together in the same manner as described above for assembling.
Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced and securely fastened in
each cell of the structure.
A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to

stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment.
When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be

properly compacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall
consider the cost of subgrade preparation in the unit prices. Filter
fabric as beds of gabions and mattresses forming the structure shall
be suitably leveled and shall be securely connected along the
complete length of all contact edges by means of the above specified
tying and connecting wire.
Before the filling material is placed, the gabions and mattresses shall
be carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the pieces shall be
handplaced to provide a neat appearance as approved by the
Engineer.
The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or

machine to assure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum voids.
Alternate placing of rock and connection wires shall be performed until
the gabion is filled. After a gabion has been filled, the lid shall be bent
over until it meets the sides and edges. The lid shall then be secured
to the sides, ends and diaphragms with the wire ties or connecting
wire in the manner described for assembling.
The vertical joints of gabions and mattress baskets shall be staggered

as in running bond in brickwork.
The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local deformation
may be avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be filled to a depth
exceeding 30 cm more than the adjoining cell.
Filter fabric shall be placed between earth surface and gabion or

mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into a flat non-
rutted surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges.
Construction equipment shall not be allowed into unprotected fabric.
Jointing is normally affected by overlapping not less than 300 mm, but
it is preferable to joint by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges
should be facing downwards to avoid protruding through the surface
material.
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of

gabions and mattresses and the area of filter cloth completed and accepted.
Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the

appropriate contract unit price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown in
the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
all necessary excavation, subgrade preparation, for furnishing, placing wire
baskets and fill materials and for all labor, equipment accessories, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
511 (1) Gabions Cubic Meter

511 (2) Mattresses Cubic Meter
511 (3) Filter Cloth Square Meter
PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
ITEM 600 – CURB AND GUTTER

600.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of curb and gutter either Precast or
Cast in place, made of concrete in accordance with this Specification at the location,
and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and design, shown on the Plans
or as required by the Engineer.
600.2.1 Material for Bed Course
Bed course materials as shown on the Plans shall consist of cinders, sand,
slag, gravel, crushed stone, or other approved porous material of such grading that all
the particles will pass through 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve.
600.2.2 Concrete
Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Plans and shall conform to the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
600.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler
Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 153/

Item 705.
600.2.4 Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall consist of one part of Portland cement and two parts of
fine aggregates with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.
The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of preparation.
600.2.5 Bonding Compound

Where bonding compound is used, it shall conform to AASHTO M 200.
600.3.1 Bedding
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base upon which the
curb and/or gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm and even surface. All soft
and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material.
Bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed of the
required thickness as shown on the Plans.
600.3.2 Cast in Place Curb and Gutter
600.3.2.1 Placing
Forms shall conform to the requirements of Item 407, Concrete Structures.

Metal forms shall be of an approved section.
Forms to hold the concrete shall be built and set-in-place as described in Item
407, Concrete Structures. Forms for at least 50 m of curb and gutter shall be in-place
and checked for alignment and grade before concrete is placed. Curbs and gutters
constructed on curves shall have forms of either wood or metal and they shall be
accurately shaped to the curvature shown on the Plans.
Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to the

requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, as modified by the requirements
below.
The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers of 100 or 125 mm each,
and to the depth required. It shall be tamped and spaded until mortar entirely covers
the top and surfaces of the forms. The top of the concrete shall be finished to a
smooth and even surface and the edges rounded to the radii shown on the Plans.
Before the concrete is given the final finishing, the surface of the gutter shall be tested
with a 3-m straight-edge and any irregularities of more than 10 mm in 3 m shall be
corrected.
The curb and gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of not more than
50 m in length except where shorter sections are required to coincide with the
location of weakened planes or contraction joints of the concrete pavement, or for
closures, but no section shall be less than 2 m long. The sections shall be separated
by sheet templates set perpendicular to the face and top of the curb and gutter. The
templates shall be approximately 5 mm in thickness and of the same width as that of
the curb and/or gutter and not less than 50 mm deeper than the depth of the curb
and/or gutter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly during the placing of the
concrete and shall remain in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its
shape but shall be removed while the forms are still in place. A preformed joint filler
approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the sheet template mentioned
above. In this event the fiber board shall be pre-cut to the shape of the curb so that its
outer edge will be flushed with the abutting curb and/or gutter.
Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans. Where a curb is placed
next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb shall be located opposite
expansion joints in the pavement.
The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has been placed.
Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement
and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall not be permitted and all rejected
portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The exposed
surface shall be finished while the concrete is still fresh by rubbing the surfaces with a
wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wetted
thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing water on the
surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth using water, it
shall then be rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one
part of fine aggregates. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is
produced. When completed, the concrete shall be covered with suitable material and
kept moist for a period of 3 days, or a membrane-forming material may be applied as
provided in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be suitably protected
from the weather until thoroughly hardened.
After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of the curb
which were excavated for placing the curb shall be refilled to the required elevation
with suitable material which shall be tamped in layers of not more than 150 mm until
consolidated.
600.3.3 Precast Curb and Gutter
600.3.3.1 Placing
The precast concrete curb and gutter shall be set in 20mm of cement mortar
as specified in Subsection 600.2.4 to the line level and grade as shown on the
approved Plans.
The precast curb shall not be more than 20cm in width at the top portion and
not be more than 25cm at the base. The precast curb and gutter shall be 1.0 m in
length and shall be put side by side consecutively with joint in between.
Joints between consecutive curb and gutter shall be filled with cement mortar
to the full section of the curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals
shown on the Plans. Where a curb and gutter is placed next to a concrete pavement,
expansion joints in the curb and gutter shall be located opposite expansion joints in
the pavement.
Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement
and two parts of fine aggregates. Plastering shall not be permitted and all rejected
portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The exposed
surface shall be finished by rubbing the surfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until
they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick
or wood in water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the
concrete has been rubbed smooth using water, it shall then be rubbed with a thin
grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of fine aggregate. Rubbing
with grout shall continue until uniform color is produced.
600.3.3.2 Handling Precast Curb and Gutter
In preparation for the handling of precast curb and gutter, all fabricated curb
and gutter of one (1) meter in length shall be provided or inserted with 2-1”Ø
PVC pipes for fitting at their required locations. The PVC pipes shall be placed
25 mm from both edge during the fresh concrete is in plastic state.
Precast curb and gutter shall be lifted on upright position and not at the points
of support and shall be the same during transporting and storage.
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast curb and
gutter to avoid cracking.
No precast curb and gutter shall be used that does not reach its final position
in the forms with the required time stipulated prior to installation.
Precast curb and gutter shall be transferred to the construction site. Fresh curb
and gutter shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which has been in a
position for more than 30 minutes.
Precast curb and gutter may only be transported to the delivery point in truck
agitators or truck mixer operating at the speed designated by the manufacturer
of the equipment, provided that the consistency and workability of the mix
concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for adequate
placement.
The length of curb and gutter to be paid for shall be the number of linear
meters of curb and gutter (cast in place) or the number of pieces of precast curb and
gutter of the required dimensions shown on the Plans measured along its front face
in-place, completed and accepted. No deductions shall be made for flattening of
curbs at entrances and no additional allowances shall be made for curbs and gutters
constructed on curves.
The length of curb and gutter determined in Subsection 600.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for Curb and
Gutter which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials for concrete, reinforcing steel if required on the Plans, expansion
joint materials, forms for drainage openings, excavation for curb and gutter,
backfilling, dumping and disposal of surplus materials, and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

600 (1) Concrete Curb (Cast in place) Linear Meter
600 (2) Concrete Gutter (Cast in place) Linear Meter
600 (3) Curb and Gutter (Cast in place) Linear Meter
600 (4) Concrete Curb (Precast) Piece
600 (5) Concrete Gutter (Precast) Piece
600 (6) Curb & Gutter (Precast) Piece
ITEM 601 – SIDEWALK
601.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of asphalt or Portland Cement

concrete sidewalk in accordance with this Specification and to the lines, grades,
levels and dimensions shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
601.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete
The cement concrete shall be Class A as specified in Item 405, Structural

Concrete.
601.2.2 Asphalt
Asphaltic material shall be as specified in Item 308, Bituminous Plant-Mix

Surface Course, Cold-Laid, or Item 310, Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot-
Laid.
601.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler
Unless otherwise ordered, the preformed joint filler shall have a thickness of 5
and shall conform to the requirements of Item 311, Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement.
601.2.4 Forms
Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer and shall extend
to the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warps and of
adequate strength to resist distortion.
601.2.5 Bed Course Material
Bed course material consists of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or
other approved permeable granular material of such grading that all particles shall
pass a 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve.
601.2.6 Asphaltic Prime Coat
Prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to the requirements of Item

301, Bituminous Prime Coat.
601.3.1 Asphalt Sidewalk
Excavation shall be made to the depth and width required that will permit the
installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted
to a firm and even surface conforming to the section shown on the Plans. All
materials from soft areas shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials.
The bed course shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 100 mm to the
depths, lines and levels shown on the Plans.
The prepared bed course material shall receive an application of prime coat in
accordance with the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat.
The asphalt mixture shall be placed on the previously primed and prepared
bed only when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the bed is sufficiently dry and weather
conditions are suitable. The mixture shall be placed in one or more layers of uniform
thickness to the total depth shown on the Plans. Each layer shall be smoothed by
raking or screeding and shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a hand
operated roller of a type satisfactory to the Engineer. After compaction, the surfacing
shall be of the thickness and section shown on the Plans and shall be smooth, even
and of a dense uniform texture. Forms, if used, shall be removed and the shoulders
shaped and compacted to the required section.
601.3.2 Cement Concrete Sidewalk
Excavation shall be as specified above. The bed course material shall be placed in
accordance with the Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course.
All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and level.
Preformed joint filler shall be set in position shown on the Plans before placing of the
concrete is started. The top of the joint filler shall be placed 5 mm below the top
surface of the finished sidewalk.
The mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall be as specified in

Item 405, Structural Concrete. The Portland Cement concrete shall be placed to the
total depth shown on the plans.
The surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10 mm with a trowel at intervals

of 1 m or, were required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of sidewalk. The
surface shall then be brushed. The edges of the sidewalk and the transverse cuts
shall be shaped with a suitable tool so formed as to round the edges to a radius of
15 mm
The area to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of sidewalk
measured, completed in-place and accepted.
The quantity as determined in Subsection 601.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for all the contract unit price per square meter for Sidewalk which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials for asphalt sidewalk, concrete sidewalk, expansion joint material, for
excavating and compacting the foundation bed, for furnishing and placing cinders,
gravel or other permeable bed course material, for prime coat material, for forms,
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
601 Sidewalk Square Meter
ITEM 602 – MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS
602.1 Description
This Item shall consist of right-of-way monuments, maintenance marker posts,

kilometer posts and/or guide posts, furnished and installed in accordance with this
Specification at the locations, and in conformity with the sizes, dimensions and
design, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be the class designated on the Plans and shall be composed of
materials conforming to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing

Steel.
Timber shall be of the species and grade shown on the Plans. Treated timber,
if required, shall conform to the requirements of Item 410, Treated and Untreated
Timber.
The metal material shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or
as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
Paints, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or as

stipulated in the Special Provisions.
Warning reflectors, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the

Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
Construction or fabrication and installation of monuments and posts shall be as

shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and shall include the attaching of
warning reflectors and the painting of posts, if required. Each monument and post
shall be set accurately at the required location and elevation and in such manner as
to insure its being held firmly in place. In constructing precast monuments, the forms
shall not be removed until after the concrete has hardened. Monuments that are
warped shall be rejected. The exposed surface of the finished monuments shall be
uniform, of even texture, and shall be free from holes, cracks and chipped edges. The
precast monuments shall not be transported to the work until the concrete has been
cured.
The quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of right-of-way

monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts
furnished, placed and accepted.

The quantities determined as provided in Subsection 602.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement
respectively, for each of the particular Pay Item listed below and as shown in the Bid
Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement\
602 (1) Right-of-Way monuments Each
602 (2) Maintenance marker posts Each
600 (3) Kilometer posts Each
600 (4) Guide posts Each
(When more than one design is specified for any of the pay items, their
respective dimensions, material types or other means of identification shall be
inserted in parenthesis immediately after the name of the pay item, and letter
suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the pay item numbers)
ITEM 603 – GUARDRAIL
603.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and guardrails of
the types called for in the contract and in accordance with this Specification, at the
locations, and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans, or as
required by the Engineer.
Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall meet the requirements
specified in the following specifications:
1. Wire rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30

2. Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181
3. Metal beam rail AASHTO M 180
Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special Provisions,
any of the following first group Philippine Timber shall be used: Ipil,
Molave, Tindalo or Yacal. Only one specie of timber shall be used in the
construction of any one continuous length of guardrail.
Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of injurious defects.

They shall be dressed and of sufficient length so that joints shall be on the rail posts.
Guardrail Hardware. Offset brackets of the resilient and non-resilient types

shall be of the type specified, or as shown on the Plans, and shall meet the strength
requirements specified.
Splices and end connections shall be of the type and design specified or as
shown on the Plans, and shall be of such strength as to develop the full design
strength of the rail elements.
Unless otherwise specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories
shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111 or
ASTM A 153, whichever may apply. All galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.
Guardrail Post. Posts shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete, as may be

specified. Only one kind of post shall be used for any one continuous guardrail.
Wood post shall be fabricated from an approved or specified timber specie

and shall be of the quality, diameter or section and length as specified, or as shown
on the Plans.
Steel post shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on the
Plans. They shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. Steel shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The posts
shall be galvanized or shop painted as may be specified.
Pre-cast reinforced concrete posts shall be of a section and length as

specified or as shown on the Plans. Concrete shall conform with the requirements of
Item 405, Structural Concrete, for class specified. Reinforcement shall conform with
the requirements of AASHTO M 31 Grade 60. All bars shall be of the deformed type.
Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or as shown on

the Plans. Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as stated
above the precast reinforced concrete posts.
Paints for steel and wood shall be specified and conform to the requirements
specified in Item 411, Paint.
603.3.1 Posts
Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown on the Plans and, where
embedded in a concrete foundation block, shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of
48 hours. The space around the post shall be backfilled to the ground line with
approved material in layers not exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be
moistened and thoroughly compacted.
603.3.2 Rail Elements
Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous

installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of
sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more than 10 mm.
Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage to the shop

coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive
primer prior to further painting. Any surface inaccessible to painting after erection
shall be given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough
brushing using an approved pressure spray.
Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base material is
exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be
protected in a manner as may be specified or directed.
The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated or salt-treated guardrail shall be

painted with three coats of white paint to within 200 mm of the ground line. The first
200 mm of posts above the ground shall be painted with two coats of black paint.
Painting shall be done only when the timber is dry and clean. Each coat of paint
shall be thoroughly dry before the next coat is applied. Paint shall be applied in
heavy coats, completely covering every part of the surface and shall be worked well
into the joints and open spaces. It shall be thoroughly and evenly spread that no
excess paint collects at any point.
Guardrail and posts, after erection has been completed, shall be stained with
two applications of approved creosote stain, covering the rails and the exposed
portions of the posts. The wood shall be dry before being stained. The first coat
shall be thoroughly dry before the second is applied. Stain shall not be applied in
damp weather.
For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be given one
shop coat of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast-drying rust-inhibitive
primer and two field coats of white or aluminum paint. Untreated wood posts shall
be given three coats of paints of the color indicated on the Plans, or as specified.
Painting shall conform to the requirements of Item 411, Paint.
Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center of end

posts, except where end connections are made on masonry or steel structures, in
which case measurement will be to the face of such structures.
End anchorages and terminal sections will be measured as units of each

kind shown in Bid Schedule. If no pay item for anchorages or terminal sections
appear in the Bid Schedule, measurement therefore shall be included in the linear
meter measurement for completed guardrail.

The accepted quantities of guardrail, determined in Subsection 603.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter
for the type specified, complete in place, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. When so
specified, end anchorages and terminal sections will be paid for at the contract unit
price for each of the kind specified and completed in place.
603 (1) Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire cable) Linear Meter

603 (2) Cable Guardrail 9Chain Link Fabric) Linear Meter
603 (3a) Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Linear Meter
Including Post
603 (3b) Metal Beam End Piece Each
604 (4) Guardrail (Timber) Linear Meter
ITEM 604 – FENCING
604.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and barbed wire or
chain link fences in accordance with the details, and at the locations, shown on the
Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
604.2.1 Barbed Wire

Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The
barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points, 14
gauge barbs spaced 100 mm apart.
604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric
Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge galvanized wire
conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type shown on the Plans. Before
ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the
material to the Engineer for testing and for approval.
604.2.3 Concrete Post
Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance with Item

405, Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered section 3 m long, or to
the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall have a smooth surface finish.
604.2.4 Steel Post
Steel posts shall be of the sections and length as specified or as shown on

the Plans. The posts shall be copper bearing steel and shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified.
604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shall be deformed steel bars

conforming to the provisions of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.
604.2.6 Hardwares
Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall be galvanized after
fabrication as specified as ASTM 153.

The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be
necessary to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence shall
generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where
necessary to provide a neat appearance.
Gates shall be constructed as shown on the
Plans 604.3.1 Erection Post
The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the
foundation block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequately supported
by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of the
concrete. The posts shall be erected to the height and location shown on the Plans,
or as ordered by the Engineer.
604.3.2 Installation of Chain Link Fence fabric
The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevation and pulled taut
between each post before spot welding, or other method of fixing, is carried out.
Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at joints, the lapping of the chain
link fence fabric shall be for a minimum of 100 mm and shall occur only at the post.
No horizontal splicing will be permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts
as shown on the Plans. Any surface protective layer damaged during welding and/or
construction shall be restored properly.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter measured
center to center of posts, of fencing erected in place and accepted.
The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively for each
of the particular items listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and
for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
604 (1) Fencing (Barbed wire) Linear Meter

604 (2) Fencing (Chain Link
Fence Fabric) Linear Meter
604 (3) Fencing (Posts) Each

604 (4) Fencing (Gates) Each
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN
605.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs in accordance
with this Specification and to the details shown on the Plans, or as required by the
Engineer.
The road signs shall comply in all respects with the “Philippine International
Road Signs Manual” published by the Department of Public Works and Highways,
Manila. The categories of road signs are designated in the Manual, namely, danger
warning signs, regulatory signs and informative signs, or guide signs. These are
referred to in the Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively.
Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs
consist of all warning signs, regulatory signs and informatory signs with the
exception of direction signs, place identification signs and the line. Non-standard
signs consist of all informatory signs which are not classified as standard signs.
The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side of triangular
signs (measured from the points of intersection of the extension of the edges), the
horizontal width of octagonal signs and the diameter of circular signs.
605.2.1 Sign Panels
Sign panels for warning, regulatory, and informatory signs shall be

manufactured from aluminum sheeting at least 3 mm thick.
605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting
The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall consist of spherical lens
elements embedded within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat surface with a
protected precoat adhesive which shall be pressure sensitive for manual application,
or tack free heat activated for mechanical vacuum-heat application.
The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective sheeting as

compared to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in Table 605.1. The
brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not less than 90% of
the given values.
Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces
Color Angle of Angle of Minimum Reflective

Incidence Divergence Brightness Value
Compared with MgO
Red -40 0.50 15
200 0.50 10
500 0.50 3
White -40 0.50 75
200 0.50 70
500 0.50 70
Yellow -40 0.50 35
200 0.50 35
500 0.50 10
Blue -40 0.50 6
200 0.50 4.5
500 0.50 0.5
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and

adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent
900 over a 50 mm diameter mandrel.
The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of withstanding

cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits, turpentine methanol.
The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectivity after being

subjected to the dropping of a 25 mm diameter steel ball from a height of 2 m into its
surface.
The adhesive shall permit the reflective sheeting to adhere accurately 48

hours after application of temperatures of up to 90 0.
The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall show no discoloration,
cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change.
Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval.
605.2.3 Posts and Frames

Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel
conforming to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts, the
Contractor may use tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All posts shall be
thoroughly cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat of
rust-inhibiting priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411,
Paint.
605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts
Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111.
605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks
The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in accordance with
Item 405, Structural Concrete and shall be of the size shown on the Plans.
605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling
Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete
foundation as shown on the Plans.
Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material approved by the

Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus
excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.
605.3.2 Erection of Posts
The posts shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the
foundation block prior to the placing of the concrete and shall be adequately
supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting
of concrete. The posts shall be located at the positions shown on the Plans.
605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation
Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the
Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be considered as sufficient
cause to require replacement of the panels at the Contractor’s expense.
The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall
be painted with enamels matching the background color.
All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by
the Engineer.
The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall
be the number of such signs of the size specified, including the necessary posts and
supports erected and accepted.
The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-standard

reflective informatory signs shall be the number of such, including the necessary
posts and supports, erected and accepted.
The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in
the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing
and installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation
blocks, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.

605 (1) Warning Signs Each
605 (2) Regulatory Signs Each
605 (3) Informatory Signs Each
ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS
606.1 Description
This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The
work shall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized traffic paint or reflectorized
pavement marking paint conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 248,
whichever is called for in the Contract, sampling and packing, preparing the surface,
and applying the paint to the pavement surface, all in accordance with this
Specification.
The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings
shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
606.2 Premixed Reflectorized Traffic Paints
Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which the glass beads are
mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so that upon application and
drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of the light beams.
Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in both white and
yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete, bituminous, bricks or
stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, parking lots and airports.
606.2.1 Classification
Premixed reflectorized traffic paint shall be classified according to the
following types based on the vehicles used:
Type I – Alkyd
Type II – Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd
606.2.2 Material Requirements
The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so combined as
to produce a paint that will conform to the following requirements.
a. Condition in container – The packaged material shall be free from lumps

and mixed readily to a smooth homogenous state.
b. Skinning – The packaged material shall not skin within 48 hours in a ¾
filled, tightly closed container.
c. Appearance of Dried Film – The paint film shall dry to a smooth uniform finish.
d. Flexibility – The dried paint film shall not show cracking or flaking after
being bent about 180 degrees over a 12.7 mm mandrel.
e. Resistance to Water – The dried paint film shall not show blistering,
peeling, wrinkling and discoloration when immersed in water for 18 hours.
f. The paint shall also conform to the physical properties specified in Table 1.
Table 1 – Physical Properties
Properties Type I and Type II
Minimum Maximum
Specific Gravity 1.5 -
Drying Time, No Pick Up,
Minutes - 40
Consistency (Kreb Units) at 20 C 65 95
g. Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to the

requirements given in Table 2.
Table 2 – Composition Requirements
Requirements
Paint Composition
Type I Type II
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Total Dry Solids, percent

By weight 60 - 60 -
Titanium Dioxide, Rutile

Percent by weight 16.0 - -
16.0
Medium Chrome Yellow,

Percent by weight 12.0 - -
12.0
Extenders, percent by wt.,

White 13.0 - 13.0
Yellow - 17.0 - 17.0
Non-volatile Content
(based on the vehicle)
percent by weight 40 - 41 -
Glass Beads, percent by

Weight 31.0 35.0 35.0
31.0
Glass Spheres or Beads Requirements:
Quantity: The amount of glass beads to be mixed with the paint shall be 500 grams per
liter of paint.
Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US
Standard Sieves shall be as follows:
Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent Passing
70 (212 – um) – 0.850 100

80 (186 – um) – 0.600 85-100
140 (106 – um) – 0.300 15-55
230 ( 63 – um) – 0.150 0-10
Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be

within the range of 1.50 to 1.60 when tested
by the liquid immersion method at 29oC.
Appearance: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and

the sum of particles that are fused, plane, angular
and colored and contains bubble shall not exceed
20 percent
606.2.3 Construction Requirements
The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the cleaning of
the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings,
the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic, the protection of all parts of
the road structure and its appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes
or smirches of paints or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and
traffic paint necessary for the entire work.
The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when the air is
misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unfavorable for the
work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp pavement surfaces, or upon pavement
which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a
porous film of paint.
The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a machine specially

made for this purpose but where brushes are used, only round or oval brushes not
exceeding 100 mm in width will be permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to
produce a uniform, even coating in close contact with the surface being painted.
Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L /m 2 and
shall dry sufficiently to be free from cracking in from 15 to 30 minutes.
All markings shall present a clean cut, uniform and workmanlike appearance.
Markings that fail to have a uniform, satisfactory appearance either by day or night,
shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and at
no cost to the Government.
606.2.4 Sampling
The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO 1512 or other
Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and Varnishes.
606.2.5 Test Methods
The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods specified in PNS
461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for Paints and Varnishes.
606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking
The paints shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with PNS
140.
The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall either be the length as
shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width or the area as shown on
the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, and the like, completed and accepted.
Separate items shall be provided for premixed reflectorized traffic paint and
reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings.
The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay
Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the
preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item.
606 (1) Pavement markings

(Premixed Reflectorized) Square Meter
606 (2) Pavement markings

(Reflectorized Thermoplastic) Square Meter
ITEM 607 – REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT
STUDS 607.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing reflective pavement studs
on the surface of the pavement in accordance with this Specification and at the
locations shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
607.2.1 Reflective Studs
Reflective studs shall be either the “Flush Surface” or “Raised Profile” type
having the following characteristics.
The “Flush Surface” reflector shall be the short base type having a maximum
base area of 180 mm x 140 mm. The base shall be formed in cast-iron with
adequate webbing to insure a firm key to the road when installed. The pad shall be
highly resilient and durable rubber reinforced with canvass and shall have a design
life of at least 5 years. The pad shall be so designed as to produce a self-wiping
action of the reflectors when depressed. The reflectors shall be made of impact and
abrasion-resisting glass and shall be hermetically sealed into a copper socket.
The “Raised Profile” reflectors shall consist of an acrylic plastic shell filled
with an adherent epoxy compound molded from methyl methacyclate into the shape
of a shallow frustrum of a pyramid with base dimensions approximately 100 mm x
100 mm and thickness of not more than 20 mm. The shell shall contain two prismatic
o
reflectors each inclined at an angle of 30 to the horizontal and having an area not
2
less than 20 cm . The reflectors shall attain the following standards for their
photometric and physical properties:
The reflectors shall have the minimum specific intensity values

expressed as candle power per foot-candle of illumination at the
reflector on a plane perpendicular to the incident light shown in Table
607.1.
Table 607.1 – Raised Profile Pavement Studs:

Photometric Properties
Specific Intensity Values
Color Crystal Yellow Red

o o o
Divergence Angle 0.2 0.2 2
Incidence Angle
o
0 3.00 1.80 0.75
o
20 1.20 0.72 0.30
Each reflector for testing shall be located with the center of the reflecting face
at a diameter of 1.5 m from a uniformly bright light source having an effective
diameter of 5 mm. The width of the photocell shall be 1.2 mm and shall be shielded
from stray light. The distance from the centers of the light source and photocell shall
be 5 mm. Failure of more than 4% of the reflective faces shall be a cause for
rejection of the complete batch.
The reflectors shall support a vertical load or kgf(10kN) when tested in the
following manner. A reflector shall be centered horizontally over the open end of a
vertically positioned hollow metal cylinders, 75 mm internal diameter, 25 mm high
and wall thickness of 6 mm. The load shall be applied to the top of the reflector
through a 6 mm diameter by a 6 mm high metal plug centered on top of the reflector.
Failure shall constitute either breakage or significant deformation of the marker at
any load less than 1000 kgf.
607.2.2 Adhesive
When “Raised Profile” type reflectors are specified, an approved two-part

epoxy adhesive shall be used.
607.2.3 Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall consist of 1 part of Portland Cement to 2 parts of fine

aggregate with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.
607.3.1 Flush Surface Type
The stud shall be installed into the pavement in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions but shall also comply with the following requirements.
Cavities in the pavement shall be clearly cut to the dimensions of the

pavement stud and shall allow a clearance of 10 mm around the stud base. The
longitudinal centerline axis of the cavity shall be the same as that required for the
pavement stud when laid to the correct line and direction.
The walls of the cavity shall be splayed back at the angle of approximately
o
30 to the vertical to facilitate a “dove-tail” joint after the mortar has set.
The bottom of the cavity shall be levelled with asphalt concrete prior to
placing the stud base which shall be pounded into position with a pounder foot
attached to the pneumatic drill.
The depth of the activity shall be such that when the stud base and reflectors
have been installed the elevation of the floor of the lens socket shall not be greater
than 2.0 mm or less than 1.0 mm above the pavement surface.
When the studs are installed into a cement concrete pavement, the stud shall
be grouted into position with asphalt concrete containing fine aggregate only or with
a cement mortar as described in Subsection 607.2.3 above.
607.3.2 Raised Profile Type
The pavement studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be paid for shall be the
number of reflectorized pavement studs of either the flush surface type or the raised
profile type, whichever is called for in the Contract, installed complete and accepted.

The quantities measured as described in Subsection 607.4, Method of Measurement,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule,
which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
excavating cavities, preparation of surfaces, applying adhesive and mortar and for all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
607 (1) Reflectorized Pavement Stud Each

(Flush Type)
607 (2) Reflectorized Pavement Studs Each

(Raised Profile Type)
ITEM 608 – TOPSOIL
608.1 Description
This Item shall consist of topsoil furnished, transported and spread, or topsoil
removed from designated areas, hauled and spread, in accordance with this
Specification at the location shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.
Topsoil furnished shall consist of fertile friable soil of loamy character without
admixture of undesirable subsoil, refuse or foreign materials. It shall be obtained
from well-drained arable land and shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay,
coarse gravel, stones larger than 50 mm in size, coarse sand, noxious seeds, sticks,
brush, litter and other deleterious substances. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining
healthy plant life and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Topsoil shall contain not less than five (5) percent organic matter as
determined by loss or ignition of samples oven-dried to constant weight.
608.3.1 Sources of Material
Topsoil shall be obtained as specified in Item 102, Excavation, or from other

approved sources. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five days before
he intends to start topsoil stripping operations. After inspection and approval by the
Engineer and prior to stripping any topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious
weeds and tall grass, brush roots and stones larger than 50 mm in diameter.
608.3.2 Placing
The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the areas and to the line and level
shown on the Plans and compacted with a light roller to a depth of not less than 100
Spreading shall not be done when the ground topsoil is excessively wet, or
otherwise in a condition detrimental to such work. The roadway surfaces shall be
kept clean during hauling and spreading operations.
After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones, roots, stumps and
other loose-lying materials shall be raked up and removed. Any erosion,
irregularities of grade or other incidental damage to the surface of the topsoil shall
be repaired and/or restored to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of Topsoil
removed, furnished and hauled complete in place and accepted.
The quantities, as determined in Subsection 608.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for each of the particular Pay
Items listed below that is shown on the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall
be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
608(1) Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter
608(2) Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter
ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING
609.1 Description
This Item shall consist of planting sprigs of living grass plants in accordance
with this Specification at locations shown on the Plans or as required by the
Engineer.
609.2.1 Sprigs
Sprigs shall be healthy living stems (stolons or rhizomes) with attached roots
or perennial turf-forming grasses of the kinds shown on the Plans, harvested without
adhering soil and obtained from approved sources in the locality of the work where
the sod is heavy and thickly matted. The presence of objectionable grasses, weeds
or other detrimental material will be a cause for rejection.
609.2.2 Fertilizers
Fertilizers shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in

mixture containing the percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid and
water-soluble potash. They shall be furnished in standard containers with name,
weight and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked. The fertilizers may be
supplied in the following form:
A dry, free-flowing fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by a

common fertilizer spreader.
A finely ground fertilizer, soluble in water suitable for application by
power sprayer.
A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment.
609.2.3 Ground Limestone
Ground limestone shall contain not less than 85 percent of calcium and
magnesium carbonates and shall be of such fineness that 100 percent shall pass
through a 2.00 mm sieve and not less than 35 percent through a 0.150 mm sieve.
Granulated slag may be substituted in lieu of ground limestone subject to the
approval of the Engineer of an adjusted application rate that will provide the
equivalent total neutralizing power of the specified limestone.
609.2.4 Topsoil
Topsoil shall perform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.
609.2.5 Mulch Material
Mulch material shall be hay, straw or other local non-toxic material.
609.3.1 Harvesting Sprigs
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before sprigs are to
be harvested and the source shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting
begins.
To begin harvesting, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75

and all clippings removed. Sprigs shall then be loosened by cross-disking,
shallow plowing or other acceptable methods. After loosening the sprigs from the
soil, they shall be gathered in small piles or windrows, watered and kept moist until
planted.
Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting sprigs,
except that when weather or other uncontrollable condition interrupts the work, a
time extension may be granted, provided the sprigs are still moist and viable. Sprigs
that have heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously damaged
during harvesting or delivery shall be rejected and be disposed off as directed.
609.3.2 Advance Preparation and Cleanup
After grading of areas has been completed and before applying fertilizer and
ground limestone, areas to be sprigged shall be raked or otherwise cleared of stone
larger than 50 mm in diameter, sticks, stumps and other debris which might interfere
with sprigging, growth of grasses or subsequent maintenance of grass-covered
areas. If any damage by erosion or other causes has occurred after grading of areas
and before beginning the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the
Contractor shall repair such damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing
irregularities and repairing other incidental damage.
609.3.3 Topsoiling
If topsoiling is shown on the Plans, it shall be done in accordance with the

requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.
609.3.4 Applying Fertilizer and Ground Limestone
Following advance preparation and cleanup, fertilizer shall be uniformly

spread at the rate indicated on the Plans. If use of ground limestone is required, it
shall be spread at the rate shown on the Plans. These materials shall be
incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm by disking, raking or
other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter,
large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface by this operation shall be
removed.
On steep slopes where fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be incorporated

effectively by mechanical equipment, they may be applied with power sprayers,
blower equipment or other approved method and need not be incorporated into the
soil.
609.3.5 Planting Sprigs
Sprigging shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is dry,
excessively wet or otherwise untillable. Sprigs shall be planted in existing ground or
in formed embankments or on topsoil as shown on the Plans. If the soil is not moist
when the sprigs are being set, water shall be applied until the soil is moist and in a
workable condition. One or more of the following methods shall be used, whichever
is directed by the Engineer:
Broadcast Sprigging – Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand or by suitable

equipment in a uniform layer over the prepared surface with spacing
between sprigs not to exceed 150 mm. The sprigs shall then be forced
into the soil to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm with a straight spade or
similar tool, or with a disk harrow or other equipment set to cover the
sprigs to the required depth.
Row Sprigging – Furrows shall be opened along the approximate

contour of slopes at the spacing and depth indicated on the Plans.
Sprigs shall be placed without delay in continuous row in the open
furrow with successive sprigs touching and shall be covered
immediately.
Spot Sprigging – Spot sprigging shall be performed as specified under

row sprigging, except that, instead of planting in continuous rows,
groups of four sprigs or more shall be spaced 450 mm apart in the
rows.
609.3.6 Mulching and Compacting
After planting or sprigs has been completed and prior to compacting, the
surface shall be cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots
and other litter brought to the surface during sprigging.
If mulching of sprigged areas is shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall
be covered with mulch in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 609.2.5,
Mulch Material, within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed,
weather and soil conditions permitting.
If mulching is not shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall be compacted
within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed, weather and soil
conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rollers or other satisfactory equipment
operated at right angles to the slopes. Compaction shall not be done when the soil is
in such condition that it is picked up by the equipment, nor shall clay soils be
compacted if so directed by the Engineer.
609.3.7 Maintenance of Sprigged Areas
The Contractor shall protect sprigged areas against traffic by warning signs or
barricades approved by the Engineer. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged
following sprigging shall be repaired by regrading and resprigging as directed. The
Contractor shall mow, water as directed and otherwise maintain sprigged areas in a
satisfactory condition until final inspection and acceptance of the work.
The quantity of sprigging to be paid for shall be the number of units of 100
square meters, measured on the ground surface, completed and accepted.
The quantity, determined as provided in Subsection 609.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for the Pay Item listed below, which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, for any required
mulching of sprigged areas and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section except topsoiling which
shall be paid for as provided in Item 608, Topsoil.
Pay Item will be made under:
Pay item No. Description Unit of Measurement
609 Sprigging 100 Square Meter
ITEM 610 – SODDING
610.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and laying of live sod on the shoulders,
slopes, ditches, or other locations as designated, construction of sod ditch checks or
similar appurtenances, as shown on the Plans or as ordered and laid out in the field
by the Engineer, all in accordance with this Specification.
The sod shall consist of healthy, dense, well-rooted growth of permanent and
desirable grasses indigenous to the general locality where it is to be used and shall
be free from weeds or undesirable grasses. At the time the sod is cut, the grass on
the sod shall have a length of approximately 50 mm (if longer, the grass shall be cut
to approximately this length) and the sod shall have been raked free from debris.
The sod shall be cut into uniform squares approximately 300 mm x 300 mm,
but not larger than is convenient for handling and transporting.
The thickness of the sod shall be uniform as possible approximately 40 mm or

more depending on the nature of the sod, so that practically all of the dense root
system of the grasses will be retained, but exposed, in the sod strip and that the sod
can be handled without undue tearing or breaking.
In the event the sod to be cut is in a dry condition as to cause scrumbling or

breaking during cutting operations, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall apply
water in sufficient quantities at least 12 hours before cutting to provide a well-
moistened condition of the sod to the depth to which it is to be cut. Sods shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
610.3.1 Preparation of the Earth Bed
The area to be sodded shall be constructed to the required cross-section and

contour, and the tops and bottoms of the slopes shall be rounded as shown in the
typical roadway sections.
The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots or other undesirable
foreign materials.
The soil on the area to be sodded shall be loosened and brought to a

reasonably fine texture to a depth of not less than 30 mm by means of equipment on
hand methods adapted for the purpose.
610.3.2 Placing the Sod
The earth bed upon which the sod is to be placed shall be moistened to the
loosened depth, if not naturally sufficiently moist, and the sod shall be placed
thereon within 24 hours after the same has been cut.
Unless otherwise required, the sod on slopes shall be laid on horizontal strips
beginning at the bottom of the slope and working upwards. When placing sod in
ditches, or in the construction of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, the
length of the strips shall be laid at right angles to the direction of the flow of the
water.
Sod shall be laid so that the joints caused by abutting ends of sod strip are
not continuous. Each sod strip shall be so laid as to abut snugly against the strip
previously laid.
As the sod is being laid it shall be lightly tamped with suitable wooden or
metal tampers sufficiently to set or press the sod into the underlying soil.
At points where it is anticipated that water may flow over a sodded area, the
upper edges of the sod strips shall be turned into the soil to be below the adjacent
area and a layer of earth place over this juncture and thoroughly compacted. At the
limits of sodded areas, the end strips shall be turned in and treated similarly.
610.3.3 Staking the Sod
On all slopes steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, sod shall be pegged
with stakes 200-300 mm in length, spaced as required by the nature of the soil and
steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven into the sod at right angles to the slope
until flush with the bottom of the grass blades.
610.3.4 Top Dressing
After staking has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of loose sod,
excess soil or other foreign material, whereupon a thin layer of topsoil shall be
scattered over the sod as a top dressing and the areas shall then be thoroughly
moistened by sprinkling with water.
610.3.5 Watering
The Contractor shall regularly water and maintain sodded areas in a

satisfactory condition for the duration of the Contract and until final acceptance of
the work by the Engineer.
Sodding shall be measured by the square meter and the quantity to be

measured for payment shall be the actual number of square meters of area on which
sod has been placed in accordance with this Specification and within the limits of
construction as designated on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer.
The quantity as determined in Subsection 610.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at Contract unit price per square meter for Sodding which price and
payment shall be full compensation for preparing the earth bed, for furnishing,
placing, staking, top dressing and watering the sod, and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

610 Sodding Square Meter
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING
611.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous shade, flowering
trees and evergreen trees less than 150 mm in diameter on the areas and in the
arrangements indicated on the Plans or as indicated by the Engineer, including the
digging and preparation of pocket holes, furnishing and placing the necessary
topsoil, mulch, water, fertilizer and other incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
611.2.1 Topsoil
Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.
611.2.2 Mulching
Mulching material shall consist of approved wood chips, ground or crushed

corn cobs, wood shavings, sawdust or peat moss. Wood chips shall be combination
of wood slivers with ground wood or sawdust.
Bracing stakes for plants shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood free from

unsound loose knots, rot, cross grain and sapwood or other defects that may impair
its strength.
Anchor stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size
specified under operations calling for their use.
Wrapping material for trees shall be waterproof paper or burlap.
The tying material to be used in wrapping trees shall be jute twine or similar
material not less than 2-ply for trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter and 3-ply for trees
over 7.5 mm in diameter.
The wire to be used in bracing trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter shall be 3 mm

(No. 11) galvanized steel wire and for trees over 75 mm in diameter, 40 mm (No. 9)
galvanized steel wire shall be used. All wires shall be new and free from bends or
kinks.
611.2.3 Trees
All trees furnished under this Item shall be 150 mm or less in diameter and
shall be true to name and type and shall follow standard names of trees in
accordance with the Bureau of Forestry Standards as adopted by the Department of
Public Works and Highways.
When specified in the Provisions, certain varieties of plants will be furnished by
the government.
The Contractor shall submit complete and detailed information concerning the
sources of supply for each item of plant materials before planting operations.
All existing laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant diseases and
infections shall be complied with and each delivery shall be accompanied by
necessary certificates of clearance to be presented to the Engineer.
Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely and well-rooted

and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time.
Plants shall be well-grown and free from insect pest and disease.
Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be

determined by the removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants nor
more than two (2) percent of total number of plants of each specie or variety except
when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two
plants of each specie or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer.
In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Government
reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective
samples. Any plant rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will
be considered as samples and will not be paid for.
611.3 Construction Methods
611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees
Balling is employed in plants and trees to be transplanted or transferred. To

ball out the trees, the depth to which the root system reaches is first determined.
Digging around the tree is then done, being careful not to cut many roots. Watering
the soil before balling is prohibited. The surface of the earth is kept as smooth as
possible. After the tree is dug out, the roots and earth is wrapped immediately with
the sacking material. The tree could now be tipped over and rolled to a new location.
These plants shall be hauled by the ball only and not by the plant itself. The slightest
indication of manufactured earth balls or hauling of the plants itself will be a cause
for rejection of such plants.
611.3.2 Digging Plants
All plants, nursery-grown or collected, shall be dug with care and skill
immediately before shipping and avoiding all possible injury to the plants, loss or
damage of the roots, particular attention being given to fibrous roots in this respect.
After the plants are dug, their roots shall not be permitted to dry out. They shall not
be exposed to hot temperatures. All plants shall be dug in dormant state and shall
be so held until planted.
611.3.3 Temporary Storage and Plant Spray
After delivery and inspection, the plants shall be sprayed with an approved
anti-desiccant prior to planting, heeling-in or storing, except in the case of collected
stock which shall not be heeled-in or stored, but shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant
immediately and planted within 36 hours after digging.
The spray shall cover both upper and lower surfaces of the branches and
foilage to the point of run-off. Spray nozzles shall be the type to produce a fine mist.
Spraying shall be included for payment in the pertinent planting item.

Following spray treatment with anti-desiccant, all plants which cannot be planted
promptly shall be heeled-in in a trench, spread and the roots covered with moist soil.
If plants are not to be stored for a period longer than 10 days, they may be placed in
an approved well-ventilated, cool and moist storage shed and the roots completely
covered with moist straw. All plants heeled-in or stored shall be properly maintained
by the Contractor until planted. In the event heeled-in plant material must be held
over for a longer period, such heeled-in material shall be lifted and replanted in a
satisfactory manner in nursery rows.
The ball of soil and roots of balled and burlapped plants, if not immediately
planted after delivery and inspection, shall be adequately protected by topsoil
covering until removed for planting in a manner appropriate to the conditions and
satisfactory to the Engineer.
Such emergency storage of plant shall be at the entire risk of the Contractor,
including maintenance of same.
611.3.4 Layout of Planting
Before digging pocket holes or beds, the Contractor shall lay out, by suitable
staking, the location of all pocket holes and beds. The layout of planting shall be
611.3.5 Roots and Top Pruning
The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6 mm diameter or larger, shall be
pruned with a clean cut removing no more than the injured portion. All plants shall be
pruned to balance the top with the root system keeping the natural shape of the
species. All dead woods shall be removed. All cuts and wounds, 12 mm or over in
diameter, shall be painted with tree wound dressing immediately after the pruning.
611.3.6 Pocket Holes

Pocket holes shall be dug at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed
by Engineer. The holes shall be dug to the depth and cross-section specified and
should be of sufficient size to provide for not less than 150 mm of top soil backfill
beneath and around the root system. The holes shall be dug with the sides vertical.
Surplus excavation from the bed and pocket holes shall be disposed off as directed
by the Engineer.
611.3.7 Backfill
The pocket holes shall be backfilled with topsoil as each plant is set. The
topsoil shall be well-tamped by the worker’s feet, rods or other approved tamping
devices as it is shovelled into the holes. The backfill in holes on slopes shall be built-
up on the lower side to catch and hold water. During planting the topsoil surrounding
the plant be slightly depressed to hold water.
611.3.8 Planting
The plants to be planted shall be the specie, variety and size specified. The
operation of the actual planting shall not be performed at any time when the soil is
not in a friable or workable condition. The Engineer shall also approve the location of
each individual plant taking into consideration its size and shape, in order that the
best possible arrangement will result.
One plant shall be planted in the center of each pocket hole and in the arrangement
shown on the Plans. The plants shall be set on tamped topsoil backfill brought to the
height necessary to plant them at the same depth they grew, carefully spreading out
the roots of barefoot stock in their natural position. Upright plants shall be kept in a
vertical position. After placing the plant in the hole, the backfill shall be carefully
made, tamping with the worker’s feet and with round-end rods or other approved
tamping devices to insure topsoil in and about all the roots. The topsoil shall be
settled in and about the plant roots by application of water but at no time shall
tamping or further topsoil backfill be made while this wet topsoil backfill is of a
consistency that would permit its being compacted or puddled by so doing. All
compaction shall be such that no plant will settle lower than the depth above
specified. No air pocket shall be left around the root of any plants.
After filling halfway on the earth ball, the burlap shall be loosened and the top
half cut off and removed after which the balance of the pocket hole shall be
backfilled and tamped.
After planting and prior to mulching, fertilizers shall be applied evenly over
the top of the backfilled area. Care shall be used so that the fertilizer does not get
into contact with the stem, trunk, branches or leaves of the plants.
611.3.8.1 Tree Planting along National Road
The trees to be used for this purpose shall be the varieties the root systems of
which grow downward rather than sideward to avoid situations where the roots
spread sideward and consequently destroy the road and sidewalk slabs.
Trees shall be planted in a neat row, within the road right-of-way (ROW) and
as close as possible to the ROW limit, with sufficient allowance so that the trees
when fully grown will not encroach on the adjoining property or touch electric and
other overhead utility lines. The center-to-center spacing between trees shall be 10-
20 metres (m) . For road sections with a generally north-south alignment, the trees
on one side of the road shall be staggered vis-à-vis the trees on the other side of the
road. This arrangement will help to ensure that enough sunlight will fall on the road
and thus help to keep the road dry even during the rainy season.
For roads without curbs, the trees shall be planted with a minimum clear
distance of 0.60 m beyond the edge of the shoulder, but in no case less than 3.0 m
from the edge of the pavement. For roads with curbs, particularly in urban areas, the
trees shall be planted with a minimum setback of 1.00 m beyond the face of the
curb.
Where there are longitudinal drainage canals, the trees shall be planted on
the outer side of such canals. On the roadway curves and intersections, the
pertinent design standards on sight distance shall be observed.
Non-traversable hazards (ravine, waiting shed, etc.) along the line of trees
shall be provided with appropriate barriers, e.g., guardrails, and clearly marked, so
that these do not pose hazards to motorists.
The Contractor concerned shall undertake and be responsible for the maintenance
of the planted trees during the contract warranty period of the road project covered
by his contract. The contractor’s maintenance work shall comply with the provision of
subsection 611.3.10 (Watching and Maintenance). The maintenance of trees shall
be faithfully undertaken as an integral part of the regular road maintenance program
and shall be included in the reports therefore as a regular work item under Activity
No. 209 of the Highway Maintenance Activity Standards.
The tree planting shall be undertaken not only along national roads programmed for
construction or improvement, but also along existing national roads especially those
outside developed urban areas where there are no trees or only a few trees have
been planted. For such existing roads, the required tree planting shall be undertaken
by the District Engineering Office concerned. The tree planting shall be undertaken
in both contractual projects and projects by administration.
611.3.9 Mulching
Within 24 hours after planting, mulching material shall be spread to cover the
plant hole and the area 150 mm outside the periphery of the plant hole. The depth
and application for wood chips shall be a minimum of 150 mm. For ground or
crushed corn cobs, sawdust or peat moss the minimum depth shall be 100 mm.
611.3.10 Watering and Maintenance
All plants shall be watered during the planting operations, subject to direction
and approval of the Engineer. From time to time during the life of the Contract,
sufficient water shall be applied so that not only will the topsoil backfill about each
plant be kept moist, but also for moisture to extend into the surrounding soil.
The Contractor shall, during the life of the Contract, properly care for all plants
furnished, planted or stored, performing such watering, weeding, cultivating or other
ordinary maintenance work as shall be necessary to keep the stock in a live and
healthy condition. Plants which have died back into the crown or beyond a normal
pruning line shall be replaced by the Contract at no additional expense to the
Government.
611.3.11 Bracing
All deciduous and evergreen trees shall be braced immediately after planting.
Deciduous trees from 1.20 m to 1.80 m in height shall have one vertical support
stake. Deciduous trees from 1.80 m to 2.50 m in height shall have two vertical
support stakes.
Balled and burlapped deciduous or evergreen trees within the above size ranges shall
be supported with the number of stakes specified for the group but instead of being
placed vertically, shall be driven so that the stake does not enter or contact the earth
ball around the plant roots. The stake or stakes shall be so placed that after being
driven in place, the upper foot of the stake is within approximately 100 mm of the trunk
at one-half of the height of the tree. If two are required, they shall be driven on opposite
sides of the tree with the stake they tops on opposite sides for fastening.
All trees, deciduous or evergreen over two and one-half meters shall be
braced by the tripod method as directed by the Engineer.
611.3.12 Dead Trees
Before completion and final acceptance of the project, all trees not healthy or
that have died back into the crown or beyond the normal pruning line shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense with trees of the specified species or
variety, size and quality and meeting the Specification.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of trees of each specie or
variety called for in the Plans furnished, planted and accepted with the necessary
mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidentals to complete the Item.
The quantities as determined in Subsection 611.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price each of the trees of each specie or variety
furnished, planted and accepted which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Item.

611 (1) Trees (Furnishing and
Transpplanting) Each
611 (2) Trees (Transplanting) Each
ITEM 612 – REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC STRIPPING MATERIALS ( SOLID

FORM)
612.1 Description
This standard specifies the requirement for reflectorized thermoplastic

pavement striping material conforming to AASHTO M 249 that is applied to the road
surface in a molten state by mechanical means with surface application of glass
beads at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range of drop-
in type and will produce an adherent reflectorized stripe of specified thickness and
width capable of resisting deformation by traffic.
Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Material shall be homogeneously

composed of pigment, filler, resins and glass reflectorizing spheres.
The thermoplastic material shall be available to both white and yellow.

Glass Beads (Pre-Mix) shall be uncoated and shall comply with the
following requirements:
Refractive Index, min. - 1.50

Spheres, Percent, min. - 90
Gradation:
Sieve Mass Percent Passing
mm
0.850 100
0.600 75-95
0.425 -
0.300 15-35
0.180 -
0.150 0-5
612.3 General Requirements
612.3.1 Composition
The pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed in the resin. The
material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign objects and shall comply with
the requirements as specified in Table 612.1.
Table 612.1 – Composition Requirements
Component White Yellow

Binder, min. 18.0 18.0
Glass Beads:
min. 30 30
max. 40 40
Titanium
Dioxide, min. 10.0

Chrome Yellow,
Medium, min. 10.0
Calcium Carbonate
And Inert Fillers,
Max. 42.0 42.0
612.3.2 Qualitative
The material shall conform to the qualitative requirements as specified in

Table 612.2.
Table 612.2 – Qualitative Requirements
Property Requirements
White Yellow
Specific Gravity, max. 2.15
Drying Time, minutes, max. 10.0
Bond Strength to Portland
Cement Concrete after
heating for four (4) hours
o
±5 min. @ 218 C, MPa, max. 1.24
Cracking Resistance @ low
temp. after heating for
four (4) hours ±5 min. @ 218
o
±2 C. No cracks
Impact Resistance after
heating for four (4) hours
o
±5 min. @ 218 ±2 C and
forming test specimens,

mm/kg, min. 115
o
Softening Point after heating 102.5 ± 9.5 C
for four (4) hours ±5 min.
o
@ 218 ±2 C.
Daylight reflectant @ 45 75 45
Degrees – 0 degrees, % min.
612.4 Application Properties
o
The material shall readily extrude at a temperature of 211 ± 7 C, from
approved equipment to produce a line 3.2 to 4.8 mm thick which shall be continuous
and uniform in shape having clear and sharp dimensions.
The material shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or injurious to
persons or property when heated during applications.
The application of additional glass beads by drop-in methods shall be at a

rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range for drop-in type. The
typical size range of spheres of drop-in type paints is as follows.
Passing 850 um (#20) sieve and

retained on 250 um (#60) sieve, % 80 – 100
Preparation of Road Surface – the materials should be applied only on the

surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid into loose detritus, mud or similar
extraneous matter, or over an old paint markings, or over an old thermoplastic
marking which is faulty. In the case of smooth, polished surface stones such as
smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing with smooth polished surface stones and/or
where the method of application of the manufacturer of the thermoplastic materials
shall be recommended, and with the approval of the Engineer.
Preparation of Thermoplastic Materials – The materials shall be melted in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction in a heater fitted with a mechanical
stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and such the local
overheating shall be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range
specified by the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the
maximum temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be
used as expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which have natural resin
binders or otherwise sensitive to prolong heating the materials shall not be
maintained in a molden condition for more than 4 hours.
Laying – Center lines, lane lines and edges lines shall be applied by
approved mechanical means and shall be laid in regular alignment. Other markings
may be applied by hand – screed, hand propelled machine or by self-propelled
machine approved or directed by the Engineer. After transfer to the laying apparatus
the materials shall be maintained within the temperature range specified by the
manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right consistency for laying.
In the case of screen application, the material shall be laid to a thickness of not less
than 3 mm or more than 6 mm unless authorized by the Engineer when laid over an
existing markings. In the case of sprayed application the material shall be laid to
thickness of not less than 1.5 mm unless authorized by the Engineer. In all cases the
surface produced shall be uniform and appreciably free from bubbles and steaks.
Where the Contractor Documents require or the Engineer direct that ballotini shall be
applied to the surface of the markings, these shall be applied uniformly to the
surface of hot thermoplastic immediately after laying such that the quality of ballotini
firmly embedded and retained in the surface after completion complies with the
requirements of Sub-section 606.2.2, Material Requirements.
Road markings of a repetitive nature, other center lines, lane lines, etc., shall
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer be set out with stencils which comply with
the size and spacing requirements shown on the Plans.
Re-use of Thermoplastic Materials – At the end of day’s as much as

possible the material remaining in the heater and/or laying apparatus shall be
removed. This may be broken and used again provided that the maximum heating
temperature has not been exceeded and that the total time during which it is a
molden condition does not exceed the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.3,
Construction Requirements.
612.4.1 Defective Materials or Workmanship
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory

manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed, the road
pavement shall be made good and materials replaced, reconstructed and/or properly
located, all at the Contractor’s expenses and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
612.4.2 Protection of the Traffic
The Contractor shall protect pedestrians, vehicles and other traffic adjacent to
the working area against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools
and materials or by spatters, splashes and smirches or paint or other construction
materials and during the course of the work, provide and maintain adequate signs
and signals for the warning and guidance of traffic.
612.5 Sampling
A minimum weight of 10 kg. of Reflectorized Thermoplastic paint shall

be taken for every 100 bags or fraction thereof.
612.6 Testing
The material shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 250 or with the
appropriate method in ASTM designation.
612.7 Packing and Marking
The material shall be packaged in a suitable containers to which it will not

adhere during shipment and storage. The blocks of cast thermoplastic material shall
be approximately 300 x 915 by 51 mm and shall weigh approximately 23 kg. Each
container label shall designate the color, manufacturer’s name, batch number and
date of manufacture. Each batch manufactured shall have its own separate number.
o
The label shall warn the user that the material shall be heated to 211 ± 7 C during
application.
The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall be the area as shown
on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width and the area as shown on the
plans of symbols, lettering, hatching and the like, completed and accepted.
The quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities represents the approximate

quantity in square meter of pavement markings, with width as shown applied at the
centerline of the road pavements to which may be increased or decreased
depending on the Engineer’s decision whether to require additional markings or
delete parts of it. Other markings representing symbols, lettering, hatching and
others in locations where they maybe required by the Engineer shall, likewise, be
implemented by the Contractor using reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings
as approved and directed.
The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 612.8, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay
Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the
preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item.
612(1) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Square Meter

Pavement Markings (White)
612(2) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Square Meter
Pavement Markings (Yellow)

Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PART A

FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

A.1.1 Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer

4. The Contractor shall provide, if required in the Contract, a two-way radio

A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer

A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer

A.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1. Lump-sum items shall be provided for the provision of:

- Survey equipment for the Engineer.

3. No separate payment shall be made in respect of consumable materials as this is

OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ACCOMMODATION FOR

B.2 MEDICAL ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES

B.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

ITEM 100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING

100.2 Construction Requirements

100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps

100.3 Method of Measurement

Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate methods:

Diameter at height of 1.4 m Pay Item Designation

100.4 Basis of Payment

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

101.2 Construction Requirements

101.2.2 Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts, and other Drainage Structures

Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or

101.2.3 Removal of Pipes Other than Pipe Culverts

101.3 Method of Measurement

101.4 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION

102.1.1 Roadway Excavation

102.1.2 Borrow Excavation

102.2 Construction Requirements

All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No

102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil

102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

102.2.6 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.

102.2.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level

102.2.8 Borrow Areas

102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material

Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a subgrade or slopes of

102.3 Method of Measurement

For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the

102.4 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic Meter

ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

No allowance will be made for classification of different types of material encountered.

103.2 Construction Requirements

103.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Boulders, logs, and other objectionable materials encountered in excavation shall be

Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be removed

Where pipe culverts are to be placed in trenches excavated in embankments, the

103.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

All excavated materials, so far as suitable, shall be utilized as backfill or embankment.

In placing backfills or embankment, the material shall be placed simultaneously in so far